bmw e93 owner's manual

The UltimateDriving Machine

Owner's Manualfor Vehicle

ba8_E9293_US.book Seite 1 Montag, 6. November 2006 1:48 13

328i328xi

335i

Owner's Manual for VehicleCongratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG


© 2006 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with thewritten consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 013 015US English XI/06, 06 12 500Printed in GermanyPrinted on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.


Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic-ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 244.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes6 Reporting safety defects

At a glance10 Cockpit16 iDrive23 Voice command system

Controls28 Opening and closing44 Adjustments55 Transporting children safely57 Driving71 Everything under control85 Technology for driving comfort and

safety97 Lamps102 Climate108 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips122 Things to remember when driving

Navigation130 Starting the navigation system131 Destination entry143 Destination guidance152 What to do if …

Entertainment156 On/off and settings160 Radio164 Satellite radio167 CD player and CD changer174 External audio device

Communications178 Telephoning192 BMW Assist

Mobility202 Refueling204 Wheels and tires214 Under the hood219 Maintenance221 Replacing components227 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference234 Technical data239 Short commands for the voice command

system244 Everything from A-Z


No

tes

4

Notes

Using this Owner's ManualWe have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehi-cle.

Additional sources of informationShould you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols usedIndicates precautions that must be fol-lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe-cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle componentsIndicates that you should consult the rel-evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.


5

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The individual vehicleWhen you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip-ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con-tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip-ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial noticeBMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairAdvanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electron-

ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle per-formed only by your BMW center or at a work-shop that works according to BMW repair pro-cedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Parts and accessoriesFor your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso-ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-cle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage


No

tes

6

to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer-tified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 warningCalifornia law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur-nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran-ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customersThe following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov


7

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.

You can also obtain other information obout motor vehicle safety from http://www.te.gc.ca


At a glanceThis overview of buttons, switches and displaysis intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will alsoassist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available foroperating the various systems.

At a glance


Co

ckp

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 51

5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 51

1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 38

2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 37

3 Opening and closing front windows 37

6Parking lamps 97

Low beams 97

Automatic headlamp control* 97Adaptive Head Light* 99

7Fog lamps 100


At

a g

lan

ce

11

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

9 Instrument cluster 12

12 Ignition lock 57

13 Buttons* on the steering wheel

14 Horn: the entire surface

15 Adjusting the steering wheel 52

17 Releasing the hood 214

18 Opening the luggage compartment lid*

8Turn signals 61

High beams, headlamp flasher 99

Roadside parking lamps* 99

Computer 72

Settings and information about the vehicle 75

Instrument lighting 100

10Windshield wipers 62

Rain sensor* 62

11 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 57

Telephone*:

> Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* selected phone numbers. Redialing if no phone number is selected

> Press longer: redialing

Volume

Changing radio stationSelecting music trackScrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable 53

Individually programmable 53

16Cruise control* 63

Active cruise control* 65


Co

ckp

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Displays for active cruise control* 65

5 Tachometer 71

6 Engine oil temperature* 72

7 Display for

> Clock 71

> Outside temperature 71

> Indicator and warning lamps 81

8 Display for

> Position of automatic transmission* 59

> Computer 72

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 76

> Odometer and trip odometer 71

> Checking engine oil level* 215

> Settings and information 75

> There is a Check Control message 81

9 Fuel gauge 72

10 Resetting the trip odometer 71


At

a g

lan

ce

13

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var-ious combinations and colors in the indicator area 1 or 2.

Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 81.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messagesThe following indicator lamps in the indicator area 1 signal that the associated functions are activated:

High beams/headlamp flasher 99

Fog lamps* 100

Lamp flashes:DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 87

Parking brake applied 58


Co

ckp

it

14

Around the center console: controls and displays


At

a g

lan

ce

15

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

1 Coupe: microphone for voice command system* and for telephone in hands-free mode*Convertible: microphone on steering col-umn

2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 227

3 Reading lamps 101

4 Coupe: glass sunroof, electric* 39

5 Interior lamps 100

6 Passenger airbag status lamp* 95

7 Control Display 16

8 Hazard warning flashers

9 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87

10 Central locking system 32

11 Automatic climate control

12 Ejecting audio CD 156

13 Changing

> Radio station 160

> Track 168

14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer

15 Selecting AM or FM waveband

16 Ejecting navigation DVD 130

18 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-tally in four directions

19 Activating voice command system* 23

20 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

22 Drive for navigation DVD 130

23 Programmable memory keys 21

24 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust-ing volume 156

25 Drive for audio CD 156

Air distribution to the windshield 103

Air distribution to the upper body area 103

Air distribution to the footwell 103

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 104

Cooling function 105

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 104

Recirculated-air mode 104

Maximum cooling 104

Residual heat mode 105

Air flow rate 104

Defrosting windows 105

Rear window defroster 105

17Heated seats* 48

PDC Park Distance Control* 85

Coupe: Roller sun blind* 111

Coupe: HDC Hill Descent Control* 87

21 Convertible:Opening and closing retractable hardtop 40


iDri

ve

16

iDrive

iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-ber of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to

basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-vidual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

1 Control Display

2 buttonOpening start menu

3 ControllerThe controller can be used to select menu items and to adjust settings:

> Move in four directions, arrow 4

> Turn, arrow 5

> Push, arrow 6

Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid

endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<


At

a g

lan

ce

17

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Menu overview

Communication> Telephone*> BMW Assist* or TeleService*

Navigation> Navigation system

> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the average fuel consumption

Entertainment> Radio

> CD player and CD changer*> External audio device

Climate> Vent settings

> Automatic programs

> Parked car operation

menu> Switching off Control Display

> Tone and display settings

> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system

> Display of service requirements and dates for statutory emissions and vehicle inspec-tions

> Settings for telephone

Operating principleAs of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:

To hide the message: Press the controller.The start menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Start menu

All iDrive functions can be called up via five menu items.

Opening start menuPress the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.


iDri

ve

18

Calling up menu items in the start menu

As of radio readiness, refer to page 57:Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain-ment and Climate by moving the controller for-wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.

You can call up the menu by pressing the con-troller.

Convenient call-up of menu itemsThe convenient call-up function enables you to:

> Call up a menu item from the start menu in the view last displayed

> Switch directly between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without having to press the button

To do so, move the controller in the corre-sponding direction and hold it for more than approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in menu

1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The active field is highlighted.

2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last selected.

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-tal or vertical lists.

2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.

3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values.

Communication

Navigation or onboard information

Entertainment

Climate

menu


At

a g

lan

ce

19

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Operating principle at a glanceThe following is a general description of opera-tions using iDrive.

For an exemplary step-by-step application refer to Setting the time, page 79.

1 Selecting a menu item:

> Turn the controller; the highlight marker moves

> Menu items in white can be selected by highlighting them

2 Activating a menu item:

> Press the controller

> New menu items are displayed or the function is executed

3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1

4 Switching between fields:

> Briefly move the controller to the left, right, forward, or backward

> Release the controller

> The active field is brighter in color

5 Adjusting settings:

> Turn the controller

> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed

> Confirm by changing the field


iDri

ve

20

Status information

1 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD or

> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of the connected mobile phone, network search or no network

> "BMW Assist"*:Active voice connection with a BMW Assist service

2 Entertainment audio output off

3 Display for traffic information*:

"TI":

Traffic information for the navigation sys-tem can be received and the transmission is switched on

4 Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"*> Roaming active

5 It is possible to make calls* if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle

Reception strength of mobile phone network, display depending on mobile phone

6 Time

Other displays:Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice command system*.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the assistance window:

> The computer or the trip computer*> The arrow or map view in vehicles with nav-

igation system*> The current position*

Selecting display1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con-troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.


At

a g

lan

ce

21

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Switching assistance window on/off1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con-troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.

To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-dow and press the controller.

Switching Control Display off/on1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control-ler.

Press the controller to switch on.

Programmable memory keys*Using the programmable memory keys, you can store and execute certain iDrive functions:

> Navigation destinations*

> Entertainment:

> Radio stations

> CD

> CD compartment of CD changer

> AUX

> Telephone: phone numbers

Storing functions

Navigation*1. Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the

destination list or address book.

2. ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.

Special features:

> If destination guidance and the map view have been started, the current destination is stored.

> If the destination is entered via map, the coordinates in the crosshairs are stored, not the current destination.

Communication1. Enter the phone number or select the num-

ber from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g. the A-Z list.


If the phone number is associated with a name, the name is also stored.

EntertainmentThe item stored in the Entertainment menu is the source that is playing at the time of storage, e.g. a radio station or a certain CD in the CD changer, not what was selected on the control-ler.

1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-tion or CD.


If the car is equipped with two drives and a CD with compressed audio files is played,

the current track is stored.<


iDri

ve

22

Executing a function ... Press the key.

The function is executed immediately. This means that, for example, if a phone number is selected, the connection is established, or if a navigation destination is called up, destination guidance is started.

Displaying memory key assignmentsYou can have the assignment of a memory key displayed by touching the key with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching the keys with an object such as a pen will not work.

Displaying brief information ... Touch the key.

The key assignment is displayed.

Navigation destination

Entertainment source

Telephone number

Not assigned

Displaying detailed information ... Touch the key for a longer

period.

Clearing key assignments1. Press the button.



3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-troller.

5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.

6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.


At

a g

lan

ce

23

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity

Voice command system

The conceptThe voice command system allows you to con-trol operation of various vehicle systems with-out removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not neces-sary to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

PreconditionVia iDrive, select the language in which the voice command system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 84.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Saying commands

Activating voice command system1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice command system is ready to receive spo-ken commands.

2. Say the command.The command appears on the Control Dis-play.

This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands.

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice command system.


Vo

ice

com

man

d s

yste

m

24

If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice command systemPress the button on the steering wheel or in the center consoleor

Commands

Having the possible commands read aloudYou can have the system read aloud the possi-ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display.To have the possible commands read out to you:

For instance, if you have selected "CD", the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer are read out*.

Opening help

Using alternative commandsThere are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Calling up functions immediately via short commandsShort commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 239.

Opening the start menu

Example: selecting a track1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio

output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.

{Cancel}

{Options}

{Help}

{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment}The system says: {{Entertainment}}

4. {CD}The system says: {{CD on}}


At

a g

lan

ce

25

Re

fere

nce

Co

ntr

ols

Dri

vin

g t

ips

Com

mun

icat

ions

Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Mo

bil

ity


NotesFor information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate

Owner's Manual.<

For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-ing:

> Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destina-tion for navigation.

> Always speak the commands in the lan-guage of the voice command system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.

> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia-tions

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

6. Select a track, e.g.:{Track 1}The system says: {{Track 1}}


ControlsThis chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle.All features and accessories that are useful for

driving and your safety, comfort andconvenience, are described here.

Controls


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote controls

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replace-able battery, refer to page 37.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-sonal Profile, page 28.

In addition, information about service require-ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 219.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Glove compartment, refer to page 111

> Driver's door, refer to page 31

> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33

New remote controlsYour BMW center can supply new remote con-trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Personal Profile

The conceptYou can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the set-tings stored for it are called up and imple-mented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for up to three remote controls.

Personal Profile settingsFor more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 32

> Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat and exterior-mirror positions after unlocking, refer to page 49

> Functions assigned to the programmable buttons* on the steering wheel, refer to page 53

> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to page 80

> Date format, refer to page 81

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 84


Co

ntr

ols

29

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 84

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, dis-tance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 75

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-trol PDC*, refer to page 85

> Automatic climate control: AUTO program, activating/deactivating cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 103 ff

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 98

> Daytime running lamps*, refer to page 98

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 61

> Audio volume, refer to page 157

> Tone control, refer to page 157

> Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 157

Central locking system

The conceptThe central locking system is ready for opera-tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Luggage compartment lid

> Fuel filler door

> Convertible: center armrest and glove com-partment

Operating from outside> Via the remote control

> Via the door lock

> In cars with convenient access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passen-ger's doors

The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being

unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-dles. In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The alarm system* is also armed or disarmed.For further details of the alarm system, refer to page 34.

Operating from insideBy means of the button for central locking, refer to page 32.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-rior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from outside

Using the remote controlPersons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

UnlockingPress the button.The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.

You can also set the way in which the car is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.This opens the start menu.




5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

30

until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-troller.

7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-troller.

8. Select a menu item:

> "All doors"Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only"Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.


Coupe: convenient openingHold the button down.The windows and the glass sunroof* are opened.

Convertible: convenient opening*Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle you can open the retractable hardtop using the remote control.

Hold the button down.The windows and the retractable hardtop are opened.

LockingPress the button.

Convertible: convenient closing*Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle you can close the retractable hardtop using the remote control.

Hold the button down.The windows and the retractable hardtop are closed.

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the button interrupts the closing process.<

Switching on interior lampsWhile the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode*You can also trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation:

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlocking the luggage compartment lidPress the button for a longer period.

The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance in all directions

before opening the luggage compartment lid. A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing.Before and after each trip, check that the lug-gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-ently unlocked.<


Co

ntr

ols

31

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Convertible: convenient loading*For easier loading of the cargo bay, you can move the opened hardtop halfway out.

1. Briefly press the button and, within one second, press again until the retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate position. The luggage compartment lid opens slightly.

2. Open the luggage compartment lid, press the cargo bay partition upward and stow the cargo in the cargo bay.

3. Press down the cargo bay partition until it engages on both sides and close the lug-gage compartment lid.

4. Press the button for a longer period to fold the retractable hardtop back in.

Setting confirmation signalsYou can program the vehicle to confirm when it has been locked or unlocked.

1. Open the start menu.




5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-troller.

7. Select the desired signal.

8. Press the controller. The signal is activated.

MalfunctionsThe remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis-charged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 28.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is gov-erned by the following:

FCC ID:LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter-ference, and

> This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using the door lock

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 29.


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

32

Convenient operationYou can use the door lock to operate the win-dows and the coupe's glass sunroof* or the convertible's retractable hardtop.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

During each closing procedure, and when opening the retractable hardtop, watch

the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-tion.<

Manual operationIn the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-tions in the door lock.

Opening and closing: from inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid when the front doors are closed, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.

Automatic lockingYou can also set the situations in which the car locks:






5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.



> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati-cally locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.

> "Lock after driving"The central locking system automati-cally locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off.

8. Press the controller. The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors> Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking> Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the


Co

ntr

ols

33

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

Luggage compartment lidIn order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the

luggage compartment lid.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The lug-gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

Opening manuallyThe integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid lock.

If you open the luggage compartment lid using the key while the alarm system is

armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off an alarm, refer to page 35.<

Coupe

Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage compartment lid opens.

Convertible

Turn the key all the way to the left beyond the two resistance points: the luggage compart-ment lid opens.

It may be necessary to close the luggage com-partment lid with more momentum since the assisted closing of the luggage compartment lid does not work if there is an electrical mal-function.


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

34

Locking or unlocking separately

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the luggage compartment lid

2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid

Locking separatelyPush the switch in the direction of arrow 1. The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system. If you give the remote control without the inte-grated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the luggage compart-ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan-tage when valet parking, for example.

Unlocking separatelyPush the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

ClosingThe handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear, other-

wise injuries may result.<

Coupe

ConvertibleTo close the luggage compartment lid, press it down lightly. The lid is closed

automatically.<

Alarm system*

The conceptThe vehicle alarm system responds:

> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-partment lid is opened

> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior motion sensor, refer to page 35

> When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away

> When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery

The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of:


Co

ntr

ols

35

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on the hazard warning flashers

> Flashing the high beams

Arming and disarmingWhen you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Even when the alarm system is armed, the lug-gage compartment lid can be opened using the

button of the remote control, refer to page 30. After the lid is closed, it is again locked and monitored.

Switching off an alarm> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer

to page 29.

> Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-tem is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to mon-itor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor is not activated.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.

> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensorIn order for the interior motion sensor to func-tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof must be completely closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre-vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In duplex garages

> During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensorPress the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp comes on for approx. two seconds, then begins to flash steadily. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Convenient access*Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote con-trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passen-ger compartment.


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

36

Convenient access supports the following functions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately

> Engine starting

> Convenient closure

Functional requirement> The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid

can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.

> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control cur-rently in use is inside the vehicle.

Comparison to standard remote controlsIn general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28.

Special features regarding the use of conve-nient access are described below.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows or glass sunroof, the

system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<

Unlocking

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre-sponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control is detected inside the car after the vehicle is unlocked, the electric steer-ing wheel lock is released, refer to page 57.

LockingTouch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical

consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.<

Coupe: convenient closureFor convenient closure, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.

Convertible: window and hardtop operationWith the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and, if the vehicle is at a standstill, the retractable hardtop when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.

Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separatelyPress the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote con-trol has been accidentally left inside the

locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage


Co

ntr

ols

37

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readinessRadio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 57.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start.<

Starting the engineYou can start the engine or switch on the igni-tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition switch, refer to page 57.

Switch off the engine in cars with automatic transmissionThe engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 58.To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition switch.

Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash1. Insert remote control into ignition switch.

2. Depress the brake.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

MalfunctionConvenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con-trol or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.

Warning lampsThe warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote

control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the batteryThe remote control for convenient access con-tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 28.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-ing up.

4. Press the cover on to close.

Take the old battery to a battery collec-tion point or to your BMW center.<

WindowsTo prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure them-selves.<


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

38

Opening, closing

Coupe

> Press the switch to the resistance point:The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point:The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move-ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: individually

> Press the switch to the resistance point:The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point:The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move-ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not close automatically.

Convertible: jointly

> Press the switch to the resistance point:All windows open as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point:All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move-ment.

> Pull the switch:All windows close as long as you pull the switch.

After switching off the ignitionWhen the remote control is removed or the igni-tion is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on closing with conve-nient access, refer to Locking on page 30.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path

prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-tions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories that might inter-fere with window movement. Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired.<


Co

ntr

ols

39

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Closing without pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-dows normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

Coupe: glass sunroof*, electric

To prevent injuries, watch the glass sun-roof while closing it.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the sunroof and possibly injure themselves.<

RaisingPress the switch.

> The closed glass sunroof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.

> The open glass sunroof automatically trav-els into the raised position. The sliding visor remains completely open.

Opening, closing> Press the switch backwards to the resis-

tance point.The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.

> Press the switch backwards past the resis-tance point. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass sunroof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or door lock, refer to page 29 or 32.

After switching off the ignitionWhen the remote control is removed or the igni-tion is switched off, you can still operate the sunroof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection systemIf the glass sunroof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass sunroof is opened again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the sunroof's travel path

prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-tions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would continue closing.<

Closing without pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, press the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Following interruptions in electrical power supplyAfter a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass sunroof can only be raised. The sys-tem must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

40

Closing manuallyIn the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass sunroof manually:

1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 221.

2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on each side to press the clips.

3. Remove the control unit.

4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.

5. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the onboard tool kit, refer to page 221, into the

opening provided. Move the glass sunroof in the desired direction.

6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the lamp cover.

Convertible: retractable hardtopThe retractable hardtop combines reliable weather protection with simple and convenient operation.

The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your convertible:

> It is advisable that you close the retractable hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather dam-age, it also offers theft protection. However, even when the hardtop is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo bay.

> Do not attach roof rack systems to the retractable hardtop, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.

> Do not attach rack systems to the luggage compartment lid, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.

> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo bay. If necessary, remove items from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.

Do not place any objects on the retract-able hardtop or on the luggage compart-

ment lid, otherwise they could fall during move-ments of the retractable hardtop and cause


Co

ntr

ols

41

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

damage or injury.Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the activated position.Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or closed may result in damage or injury.Do not reach into the mechanism while the hardtop is opening or closing. Keep children away from the swiveling area of the retractable hardtop.<

The retractable hardtop cannot be moved at temperatures below +147/–106. A

message appears on the Control Display.<

The retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is

stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not drive off until the hardtop has stopped mov-ing.<

Before opening and closing> Comply with the safety precautions

described above.

> Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 115, otherwise it will not be possible to open the retractable hardtop.

> Do not place any objects next to or on the cargo bay partition and close the storage compartment on the left side of the cargo bay.

> Do not exceed the maximum loading height under the cargo bay partition; refer to the sticker in the cargo bay showing a line indi-cating the maximum height.

> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is closed.

> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a lamp.

Opening and closingWhen the vehicle is stationary and at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 57:

If possible, conserve the battery by only operating the retractable hardtop when

the engine is running.

Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly.<

1 Pull button: open the retractable hardtop.Push button: close the retractable hardtop.

2 LEDs

The side windows move down slightly when the button for hardtop operation is

pulled or pushed.<

If you push or pull the button for a longer period after the LED 2 goes out, the windows move up again.<

LEDsIn the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up.

> While the hardtop is being operated, the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.

> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the button is pushed, either the cargo bay parti-tion is in the raised position or a malfunction has occurred. The retractable hardtop can-not be moved.

InterruptionThe automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for hardtop operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the button.


Op

enin

g a

nd

clo

sin

g

42

A hardtop that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard.

Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce-dure several times in close succession as this could damage the mechanism.<

If the hardtop is not fully opened or closed, the luggage compartment lid can-

not be opened and the windows cannot be moved.<

Convenient operation with remote control and via door lockRefer to pages 30 and 32.

Wind deflector*The wind deflector keeps air movements in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the hardtop is open and provides an even more comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.

InstallationThe wind deflector is stored in a protective cover in the cargo bay. The protective cover contains short instructions on how to operate the wind deflector.

1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.

2. Press together the top and bottom sections until the catch engages, arrow 2.

3. Push the fastening pin 3 into the opening provided on the right side of the vehicle until it snaps into place.

4. Push the fastening pin 4 into the opening provided on the left side of the vehicle until it snaps into place.

5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the right fastening pin into the holders.

6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the left fastening pin into the holders.

7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-tor.

With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if

the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.<

Only turn the rotary handle within the range between the two symbols, other-

wise the cable system inside the wind deflector could be damaged.<


Co

ntr

ols

43

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Removing the wind deflectorProceed in the reverse order as used for instal-lation.

Loading functionCargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the vehicle even if the wind deflector has been installed.

1. Lower all windows.

2. Fold down the top section of the wind deflector, arrow 1.

3. Turn the rotary handle to position , arrow 2.

Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.


Ad

just

men

ts

44

Adjustments

Sitting safelyThe ideal sitting position can make a vital con-tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-junction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-tems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting chil-dren safely, refer to page 55.

AirbagsAlways maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing is to come between the air-bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air-bag is triggered.Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbags, other-wise serious injuries could result if the airbags suddenly deployed.<

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum-stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 94.

Head restraintA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 46.

Safety beltBefore every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-wise the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Safety belts, refer to page 50.

Seats

Note before adjustingNever attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an


Co

ntr

ols

45

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

accident.On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-ger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-mally provided by the belt.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 46, and on damaged safety belts on page 50.

Manual adjustmentObserve the adjustment instructions on page 44 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Longitudinal directionPull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position.After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop-erly.

HeightPull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Tilt*

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support*

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-ward or back.

Electrical adjustmentObserve the adjustment instructions on page 44 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<


Ad

just

men

ts

46

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

4 Backrest

5 Convertible: head restraints

Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manu-ally, refer to Head restraints below.

Longitudinal adjustment from outside/behind*

To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.

> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width*

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-eral-support pads.

Press the front or rear end of the switch.Backrest width decreases or increases accord-ingly.

Head restraintsA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the


Co

ntr

ols

47

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.<

Front seats

Coupe: height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Coupe: removing1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Convertible: height adjustment

> To raise: press the button upward.

> To lower: press the button downward.

Coupe: rear seats

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat backrest slightly forward and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Only remove the head restraints if no pas-sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall

head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.<

Entering the rear seats

Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal adjustment

Convenient entryThe convenient entry feature includes a mem-ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.


Ad

just

men

ts

48

1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest for-ward.

2. Push the seat forward.

Previous positionPush the seat backward and swing the backrest back.

When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured

and that no objects are damaged.Before driving off, engage both seats and back-rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.<

Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment

Coupe

ConvertibleSeat backrest warning lamp:Comes on when a seat backrest is not engaged. In addition, a message will

appear on the Control Display.

Convenient entryThe convenient entry feature includes a mem-ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.

2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.

Previous positionPress the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.

When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are

damaged.Before driving off, engage both seats and back-rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.<

Heated seats*

Press once for each temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.


Co

ntr

ols

49

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

To switch off:Press button longer.

If you continue driving within approx. the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

Seat and mirror memory*You can store and call up two different combi-nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-port are not stored in memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button.The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-tions are stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Call-upDo not call up memory while you are driv-ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-

ment could result in an accident.<

Convenience mode1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio readiness, refer to page 57.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off, refer to page 57.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally:Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Call-up with the remote controlThe driver's seat position last stored is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select the occasion on which the seat is reset to that position.

> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked

> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-upiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.







Ad

just

men

ts

50

until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.


7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-troller.

8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".


Switching off automatic call-upSelect "Deactivated" and press the controller.

Safety beltsObserve the adjustment instructions on page 44 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

ClosingMake sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-erly, refer to page 44.

Opening1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats

The indicator lamp comes on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display. Check whether the safety

belt has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety beltsIf the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-

tem, including any belt tensioners or child-restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-


Co

ntr

ols

51

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-tion properly.<

Coupe: belt hand-over

The conceptThe belt hand-over makes it easier for you to fasten your safety belt. When you close the door and switch on radio readiness or the igni-tion, the belt hand-over extends automatically and presents the in a position that is convenient for fastening it around you. After you have fas-tened your safety belt, the belt hand-over retracts to its original position.

Even if you have not yet fastened your safety belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:

> Wait for more than approx. one minute

> Open the corresponding door

> Start to drive.

Closing the respective door reactivates the belt hand-over if the ignition or radio-readiness is on.

Front passenger's seatThe belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is occupied and after the front passenger's door is closed.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrorsThe front passenger's mirror is more con-vex than the driver's mirror. The objects

seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind

you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci-dent.<

1 Adjustments

2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*

3 Folding mirrors in and out*The settings for the exterior mirrors are stored for the remote control currently in use*, refer to Personal Profile, page 28. The stored positions are called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.

Manual adjustmentThe mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out*At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with

button 3, to prevent them from being damaged due to the width of the vehicle.<

Automatic heatingAt outside temperatures below a certain limit, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.


Ad

just

men

ts

52

Passenger-side mirror tilt function – automatic curb monitor*

Activating1. Push the switch to the position for the

driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever to position R.The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.

DeactivatingPush the switch to the position for the passen-ger-side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

AdjustmentsDo not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, otherwise there

is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-ment.<

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi-tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.


Co

ntr

ols

53

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Electric steering wheel lockThe steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-cally when the remote control is removed or inserted, refer to page 57.

Programmable buttons on the steering wheelYou can program the buttons to suit your per-sonal preferences:

These settings are stored for the remote con-trol currently in use.





4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.

A list showing various functions is dis-played:

> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice messages from the navigation system*

> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanent shut-off of outside air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air con-trol on page 104

> "Mute on / off" To mute the audio sources

> "Monitor on / off" To switch the Control Display on/off

> "Telephone list"*To show/hide the phone book or last dis-played list of stored phone numbers

> "Next entertainment source"To change the audio source

5. Select the desired function and press the controller.

6. Select a button, if appropriate, and press the controller.

You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.


Ad

just

men

ts

54

Operating a functionBriefly press the appropriate button on the steering wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:

> Switch voice instructions on/off:Press the button for a longer period.

> To repeat the last voice instruction:Press the button briefly.

> To cancel a voice instruction during an announcement:Press the button briefly.


Co

ntr

ols

55

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Transporting children safely

The right place for childrenDo not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger

themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Children always in the rearAccident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only

in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Exception for front passenger seatShould it be necessary to use a child-restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child-restraint system. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 94.

Installing child-restraint systems

Observe the child-restraint system man-ufacturer's instructions when selecting,

installing and using child-restraint systems. Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin-ished.<

Standard child-restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt

section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child-restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger's seatAfter installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger's seat, make sure

that the front and side airbags for the front pas-senger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<

Backrest width*The backrest width of the front passen-ger's seat must be at its widest possible

setting. Do not change the setting after install-ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-ited.<

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-ting, refer to page 46.

2. Install the child seat.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger's safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt1. Secure the child-restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.


Tra

nsp

ort

ing

ch

ildre

n s

afel

y

56

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt1. Open the belt buckle

2. Remove the child-restraint system.

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH child-restraint fixing systemLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren.

When installing and using LATCH child-restraint systems, comply with the sys-

tem manufacturer's operating and safety instructions.<

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.

Make sure that the two lower LATCH anchors are properly engaged and that

the child-restraint system rests firmly against the seat backrest.<

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protec-tive caps.

Coupe: child-restraint system with tether strap

Use the top tether anchors to secure child-restraint systems only, otherwise

the anchors could be damaged.<

For child-restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.

Coupe: placement of the tether strapMake sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not

twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-wise the strap will not properly secure the child-restraint system in the event of an accident.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Rear window shelf

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys-tem

If necessary, fold the anchors upward before use.

1. Push the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.

3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.

4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.


Co

ntr

ols

57

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

> Radio readiness switches on.Individual electrical consumers can operate.

> The electric steering wheel lock disen-gages audibly.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock before you move the vehicle, other-

wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis-engage and you will not be able to steer the car.<

Removing the remote control from the ignition lockPress the remote control in briefly; it is ejected part of the way.

At the same time:

> The ignition switches off if it was on before-hand.

> The electric steering wheel lock engages audibly.

Automatic transmissionYou cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

Briefly press the start/stop button to switch radio readiness or the ignition on or off. Do not press the brake or clutch while doing so.

Briefly pressing the start/stop button while the brake or clutch is depressed

starts the engine.<

Radio readinessIndividual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are dis-played in the instrument cluster, refer to page 71.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> In cars with convenient access*, by touch-ing the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 36

Ignition onAll electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to page 71.

When the engine is off, please turn off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical

consumers in order to preserve the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition offAll indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-plays in the instrument cluster go out.


Dri

vin

g

58

Starting the engineDo not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-sents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in idle or move the selector lever to position P and apply the park-ing brake to prevent the car from moving.<

When starting the engine, do not press the accelerator pedal.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Manual transmission1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.

3. Briefly press the start/stop button.

Automatic transmission1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.


Special starting conditionsIn the following situations, press the accelerator pedal halfway down when starting the engine:

> If the engine does not start on the first attempt, for instance when it is extremely hot or cold.

> If the engine is started at very low tempera-tures, below approx. + 57/–156, at high altitudes above approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-sion or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the cat-alytic converter.<

Switching off the engineAlways take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking on a downhill incline, apply the parking brake, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.<

Manual transmission1. With the car at a standstill, briefly press the

start/stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Automatic transmission1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.


3. Apply the parking brake.

Parking brakeThe parking brake is primarily intended to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lampThe indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still

applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.


Co

ntr

ols

59

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

ApplyingThe lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do

not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-tinuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, too violent an application of the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-ing action, occasionally apply the parking

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.The brake lamps do not light up when the park-ing brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise

the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse gearSelect this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic*In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 60.

Vehicle parkingTo prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the

parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Disengaging the remote controlIn order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock.

Selector lever positionsP R N D M/S + –

Displays in the instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions> With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P: interlock.


Dri

vin

g

60

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P ParkSelect this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

R ReverseSelect this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral, idleYou can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic positionPosition for normal vehicle operation. All for-ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-tion D.

Kick-downKick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-throttle resistance point.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot:The sport program is activated and DS appears in the instrument cluster. This position is rec-ommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

To use the automatic mode again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting gears via the selector leverWhen you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. The instrument clus-ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the steering wheelThe shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission automatically switches to manual mode.

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of


Co

ntr

ols

61

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

time, the transmission automatically switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.

> To shift down: press one of the shift pad-dles.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

Overriding selector lever lockShould the selector lever refuse to move out of position P although the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 221, press the red

lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position.

Turn signals/headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signal indicators

Using turn signalsPress the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator

has failed.<

Indicating a turn brieflyPress the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signal activationPress the lever as far as the resistance point.The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.








Dri

vin

g

62

until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.

Triple turn signaling is activated.

Wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-

sitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipersPress the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-tion when released.

Normal wiper speedPress once.

The system switches to operation in the inter-mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speedPress twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-ton lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensorTurn knurled wheel 5 up or down.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensorPress the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do

so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps*Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.


Co

ntr

ols

63

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Washer fluidWasher fluid antifreeze is flammable. Always keep it well away from sparks and

open flames, and store it in the tightly closed original container, well out of the reach of chil-dren. Comply with the instructions on the con-tainer.<

Washer fluid reservoir

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-mendations.

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure

the correct concentration is maintained.<

CapacityApprox. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Cruise control*

The conceptCruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column. In order to maintain the specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle when the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse

conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

Manual transmissionYou can shift gears while cruise control is acti-vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-ing

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-ating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand


Dri

vin

g

64

Maintaining current speedTap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.The car's current speed is stored and main-tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys-tem will brake the vehicle slightly.

Increasing desired speedRepeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the leverAccelerating slightly:

Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerating significantly:

Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speedRepeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-tance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the

minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Deactivating cruise controlTap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti-vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission

> When you select the automatic transmis-sion's neutral position N

> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

Warning lampThe warning lamp comes on when cruise control has been deactivated by applying the parking brake or as a

result of DSC intervention. A message appears on the Control Display.

Resuming a speed stored beforehandBriefly press the button, arrow 4. the stored speed is resumed and maintained.

In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:

> When driving stability control systems are intervening

> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi-tion

> In cars with automatic transmission: when you engage selector lever position N

> When the ignition is switched off


Co

ntr

ols

65

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y


1 Stored speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 82.<

MalfunctionThe warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You

can find more information starting on page 81.

Active cruise control*

The conceptWith active cruise control, you can select a desired speed which is not only automatically maintained when driving on open roadways, but also varied to maintain a selected distance set-ting as slower traffic is encountered.

Active cruise control is a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on high-ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe-cially on longer trips, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.

Within the limits of its capability, the system automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify

the distance to be maintained from the vehicle in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the distance is speed-dependent. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automat-ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig-nal a following driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main-tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected by increasing the throttle setting and shifting gears automatically or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed will be held when driving downhill, too.

Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con-ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Pay special attention to the System limitations section beginning on page 69.

Braking sensation> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-

tem is braking, pedal sensation will be slightly different from the usual.

> Possible noises during automatic braking are normal.

Manual transmissionYou can shift gears while cruise control is acti-vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.

Range of applicationsThe minimum desired speed is 20 mph or 30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is 110 mph or 180 km/h.

As with conventional cruise control sys-tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the driver’s own


Dri

vin

g

66

personal responsibility, alertness and aware-ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering inter-changes, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise driving situations could result that pose the risk of accidents.<

One lever for all functions

1 Store and increase desired speed

2 Store and decrease desired speed

3 Deactivate system, refer to page 67

4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-tance, refer to page 68

5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead, refer to page 67

Storing current speedBriefly press the lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull it, arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.

The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instru-ment cluster.

Increasing desired speedPress or tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis-played.

> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis-tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of 110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.

The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.

Decreasing desired speedPull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

The other functions work analogously to those described under Increasing desired speed.


Co

ntr

ols

67

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Selecting distance

> Press downward: Increase distance

> Press upward: Decrease distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru-ment cluster.

Use good judgment to select the appro-priate following distance given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-ommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<

Deactivating cruise control

Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti-vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When the speed is reduced to below 20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation

> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission

> When you select the automatic transmis-sion's neutral position N

> When you activate the Dynamic Traction Control DTC

> When you deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

> When the system does not recognize any objects for a longer period of time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoul-der or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 68

> When you apply the parking brake

When the system is deactivated, you must brake the vehicle yourself and/or

maneuver as necessary, otherwise there is a risk of accident.<

Warning lampThe warning lamp comes on when active cruise control has been auto-matically deactivated due to a driving

speed below 20 mph or 30 km/h, an application of the parking brake or a DSC intervention. A message appears on the Control Display.

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3 This distance is always set when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.

Distance 4


Dri

vin

g

68

Resuming stored desired speed and distanceBriefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed and distance are regained and maintained.

In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:

> When driving stability control systems are intervening

> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi-tion

> In cars with automatic transmission: when you engage selector lever position N

> When the ignition is switched off


1 Stored desired speed

2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead

Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-tance; driver must brake the vehicle

Flashes in yellow: driving stability control systems are intervening; cruise control is deactivated

3 Selected distance to vehicle aheadThe indicator lights up as soon as the sys-tem is activated.

4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-played

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation

are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 82.<

Warning lampsThe indicator 2 flashes in red; a signal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Active cruise con-

trol cannot automatically restore the distance to the vehicle ahead. This indicator does not release you from your responsibility to adapt your desired speed and driving style to prevailing driving conditions.

The indicator 2 flashes in yellow. The prerequisites for operating active cruise control are not met, e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC interventions. Active cruise control

is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if desired, by tapping or pulling the lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It is not pos-sible to resume a stored speed.

Radar sensor

The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt, snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure to use particular care when removing any layers of snow or ice from the sensor.

When the radar sensor is not properly posi-tioned, active cruise control cannot be activated at all.


Co

ntr

ols

69

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

MalfunctionThe warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message

appears on the Control Display. You can find more information starting on page 81.

System limitations

Always remember that the range and abil-ity of the system does have physical limi-

tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback. It is also possible that the system may not detect smaller moving objects such as motor-cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the sys-tem will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alert-ness.<

Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning

system.<

If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi-cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected. Be aware that changing to a clear, unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle accelerating.

Be certain to deactivate the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-

ramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.

While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys-tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. Therefore, the system cannot decrease your speed for large differences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<

Active cruise control can only decelerate the vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.


Dri

vin

g

70

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane ahead of your vehicle.

When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of collision. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi-cle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<

Behavior in curves

Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Your responsibilityYour actions have priority at all times. When you press the accelerator pedal while driving with active cruise control, the automatic braking function will be temporarily interrupted. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the desired speed or the selected distance to the vehicle ahead is achieved again.

Do not leave your foot on the accelerator pedal and make sure that no objects such

as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal. Otherwise the system may not be able to brake the vehicle.<


Co

ntr

ols

71

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Everything under control

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature display and clock

3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition

is switched on

> To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measureTo select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to page 75.


Time, outside temperature displaySetting the time, refer to page 79.

Outside temperature warningWhen the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should there-

fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded

roads, for example, otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Odometer and trip odometerResetting trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parkedIf you still want to view the time, outside tem-perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni-tion lock:Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.


Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

72

Coolant temperatureA warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi-tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis-play.

Check coolant level, refer to page 218.

Engine oil temperature*

When the engine is at normal operating temper-ature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 2107 and approx. 3007/approx. 1007 and approx. 1506.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-sage appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 15.9 US gallons/60 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 202.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

ReserveOnce the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis-play.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer


Calling up informationPress the button in the turn indicator lever.

The following items of information are dis-played in the order listed:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption*To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 75.

Cruising rangeDisplays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.


Co

ntr

ols

73

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y



Average speedPeriods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you can have the average speed for another trip dis-played.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumptionDisplays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-mum exhaust emissions.

Displays on the Control DisplayYou can also call up the computer via iDrive; for operating principle refer to page 16.


2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".


until "Car Data" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-troller.

> Estimated time of arrival at destination:

> Manually enter a distance in the com-puter, refer to information further below

> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-tem, refer to page 131

> Cruising range

> Distance to destination:

> Manually enter a distance in the com-puter, refer to information further below

> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-tem, refer to page 131

> Average speed


Resetting valuesYou can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.


Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

74

Entering a distance manually1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically entered during destination guidance.

Trip computerThe trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday trip.


2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-troller.

> Departure time

> Driving time

> Distance traveled

> Average speed


Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all values to zero:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

Display optionsYou can display the computer or the trip com-puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con-troller.


> "Onboard info"

> "Trip computer"



Co

ntr

ols

75

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Settings and information

Operating principle

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set val-ues

> Calling up computer information 72

3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 100

4 Calling up Check Control 81

5 Checking engine oil level 215

6 Setting the time 79

7 Setting the date 80

8 Viewing service requirement display 76

Exiting displaysThe outside-temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measureYou can set units of measure. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.





4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.



Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

76

until "Units" is selected and press the con-troller.

6. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

7. Select the desired measurement unit and press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by

your BMW Service Advisor.<

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".

3. Press button 2.

4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.


Co

ntr

ols

77

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting functions

2 Service requirements

3 Engine oil

4 Roadworthiness test*5 Microfilter*6 Spark plugs*

7 Front brake pads

8 Rear brake pads

9 Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

Supplementary informationYou can have further information on the scope of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis-play, refer to page 16.



3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.


until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con-


Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

78

troller until "Status" is selected and press the controller.

A list of selected maintenance operations and, if applicable, inspections required by law is dis-played.

You can request more detailed information on every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:Select the arrow and press the controller.

SymbolsNo service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man-dated inspection is approaching. Please

schedule a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections*Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 80, otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser-vice is not ensured.





5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.

7. Select "State inspection" and press the controller.

8. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.


12. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Select and press the controller.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 219.


Co

ntr

ols

79

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

ClockThe settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.

Setting the time

In the instrument clusterTo set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the time format below.

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.


7. Press button 2.The system accepts the new time.

Via iDriveiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.


3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is selected and press the controller.


Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

80

5. If necessary, move the controller forwards to move the highlight marker to the upper-most field.

6. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.

Adjusting settings8. Turn the controller to set the hours and

press the controller.

9. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

The system accepts the new time.

Switching on the hour signal*You will hear three tones just before each full hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.

Setting the time format1. Open the start menu.




5. Select "Time format" and press the control-ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the controller.

DateThe settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.

Setting the date

In the instrument clusterTo set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.


5. Set the month and the year in the same way.


Co

ntr

ols

81

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

6. Press button 2.The system stores the new date.

Via iDriveiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.




4. Select "Date" and press the controller.

5. Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first date display setting is selected.


7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

8. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.

Setting the date format1. Open the start menu.




5. Select "Date format" and press the control-ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the controller.

Check Control

The conceptThe Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circum-stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes-sages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in both the indicator area 1 and the display 2 in various combinations and colors.

indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you.


Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

82

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to page 82.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

To exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages remain visible until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur

at the same time, they are displayed in succes-sion.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Viewing stored Check Control messages

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa-nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".

2. Press button 2."CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages.If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

4. Press button 2.The display again shows the outside tem-perature and the time.

Viewing more information lateriDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.




Co

ntr

ols

83

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y



5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select a text message and press the con-troller.

To exit the display: Select and press the controller.

Speed limitYou can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in

an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.





4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

Setting or changing the limit1. Select speed value and press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the limit.


Applying your current speed as limitSelect "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating the limitSelect "On" and press the controller.

Limit is activated.

StopwatchiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.





Eve

ryth

ing

und

er c

on

tro

l

84

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-ler.

Starting, stopping or resetting> Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand.

> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.

Taking an interim time readingSelect "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch

is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.<

Altering settings

Language on the Control DisplayThe language of the Control Display can be set. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.






until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Text language" and press the con-troller. You can switch to another language for the display texts and navigation mes-sages.

6. Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.

Brightness of the Control DisplayThe brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.





4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached.


Co

ntr

ols

85

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Technology for driving comfort and safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The conceptThe PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in either bumper.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-erwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec-ond when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Signal tonesWhen nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-tance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-uous tone sounds.

An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds

> if you remain in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors

> if you are driving parallel to a wall.

MalfunctionThe indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-tioning. A message appears on the

Control Display. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.

PDC with visual warningYou can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis-play even before the acoustic signal sounds. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.








Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

86

until "PDC" is selected and press the con-troller.

6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-troller.

The PDC screen is activated.

The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limitationsEven with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also sub-ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out-side or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<

Driving stability control systemsYour BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake SystemABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained

even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 123.

Electronic brake-force distributionThe system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

DBC Dynamic Brake ControlWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-est possible braking distance during full brak-ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

DSC Dynamic Stability ControlDSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel-erate. DSC also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks.<


Co

ntr

ols

87

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Deactivating DSC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSCPress the button again; the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

For better controlIf the indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

If the indicator lamps are on: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction ControlDTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in the instrument cluster come on.

For better controlIf the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

If the indicator lamps are on: DTC has been activated.

Deactivating DTCPress the button again; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

xDrive*xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system. The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and road conditions.

Hill Descent Control*HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls your speed on steep downhill gradients and makes it even easier to control your BMW's handling under these conditions. The vehicle then moves slightly faster than double walking speed without the driver needing to intervene.

HDC can be activated as long as you are driving under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or


Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

88

35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically reduced to slightly more than double walking speed and maintained.

Increasing or decreasing speedBy accelerating or braking you can change the speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph, approx. 5 to 25 km/h.You can specify a target speed within the same range using the cruise control lever.

1 To increase speed

2 To decrease speed

Activating HDC

Press the button; the indicator lamp lights up.The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle is being braked automatically.

Deactivating HDCPress the button again; the indicator lamp goes out.

HDC is automatically deactivated in the follow-ing situations:

> At speeds above approx. 40 mph or 60 km/h

> After switching off the ignition.

Using HDCIn cars with manual transmission:Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.

With automatic transmission:You can use HDC in any drive position.


1 Display for target speed

2 HDC display

MalfunctionThe HDC display disappears during HDC oper-ation, or does not appear:HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces-sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

Drive-off assistantThe drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.

2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the

brake is released. Depending on vehicle load, the car may roll backwards a little during this time span. Drive off without delay after releas-ing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll back-wards.<


Co

ntr

ols

89

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Flat Tire Monitor FTM*

The conceptThe Flat Tire Monitor monitors tire pressures while the car is being driven. The system reports any significant loss of pressure in one tire in relation to another.

If a tire loses pressure, its rolling radius changes, and this in turn alters the speed of rotation. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirementIn order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-rect tire inflation pressure.

The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-

rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<

System limitationsThe Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage

caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.<

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Snow chains are attached

Initializing the systemThe initialization is completed during driv-ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con-tinued automatically. Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.<






5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the con-troller.

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

9. Start to drive.Initialization is completed while the car is in motion.


Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

90

Indication of a flat tireThe warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat

tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.

If the car is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, refer to page 212, the stan-

dard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture if you continue driving.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-sure in all four tires.

If all four tires are inflated to the cor-rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor

might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 90 miles/150 km

> With a full load or when towing a trailer: 4 persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h. In the event

of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a

suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.<

MalfunctionThe warning lamps come on in yel-low. A message appears on the Con-trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed. Have the

system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*

The conceptTPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirementIn order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-tion pressures are correct.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth-erwise, the system may malfunction.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been

changed, reset the system.<

System limitationsTPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-den severe tire damage caused by out-

side influences.<

The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-cated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio fre-quency.


Co

ntr

ols

91

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Status indicator on the Control DisplayThe color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system.

TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven. The tire pressures do not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators.

GreenThe tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value.

"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.

One wheel yellowThere is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.

All wheels yellowThere is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-sure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.

GrayThe system cannot detect a puncture.

Possible reasons for this:

> TPM is being reset

> Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency

> Malfunction

Resetting the systemEach time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been

changed, reset the system.<


1. Press the button The start menu is called up.




5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the con-troller.

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.


9. Start to drive.The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be inter-

will be adapted

will be adapted


Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

92

rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. On the Control Display, the tires are shown in green and "Sta-tus: TPM active" is displayed again.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting and determining the inflation

pressures, all tires on the Control Display are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is shown.<

Message for low tire inflation pressureThe warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-

tial loss of tire pressure.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If the car is not equipped with Run-Flat Tires, refer to page 212, the stan-

dard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture if you continue driving.<

2. In the event of complete pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:

> With a light load:1 to 2 persons without luggage:approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load:2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage:approx. 95 miles/150 km

> With a full load:4 persons, cargo bay full:approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.<

MalfunctionThe small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu-ously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display,

the tires are shown in gray and a message appears. No punctures can be detected.

This type of message is shown in the following situations:

> If there is a malfunctionHave the system checked.

> If a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted

> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.

Message for unsuccessful system reset

Both warning lamps come on in yel-low. A message will appear on the Control Display. The system is not reset after a tire has been changed,

for example.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 91.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemsEach tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As


Co

ntr

ols

93

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-flation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering*

The conceptActive steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low road-speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-

ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct, and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar-geted corrections to the steering angle pro-vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 87.

MalfunctionThe warning lamps come on. Active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at

higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi-tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil-ity-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Have the system checked.

Brake Force Display

On the left: normal braking

On the right: sharp braking


Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

94

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags for driver and front passenger

2 Head airbags, front and rear

3 Side airbags in the seat backrests

Protective actionObserve the adjustment instructions on page 44 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air-bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags have been designed to not be trig-gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-cifically approved for seats with integral side air-bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod-ify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol-stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides

of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.Do not touch the individual components imme-diately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air-bag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emer-gency or undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warning notices and information about the air-bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbagsAn analysis of the impression in the front pas-senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status

of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-bags below.

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau-

tions and handling instructions under Trans-porting children safely, refer to page 55.


Co

ntr

ols

95

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The front and side airbags can also be deacti-vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the rele-vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Other-wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<

Status of front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-bags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accor-dance with whether and how the front passen-ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are acti-vated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp comes on as intended when a child in a specially designated child-restraint system is detected on the seat.The front and side airbags for the front pas-senger are not activated.

> The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat.The front and side airbags for the front pas-senger are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty.The front and side airbags for the front pas-senger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

As of radio readiness, refer to page 57, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction> Warning lamp does not light up at radio

readiness or beyond.

> Warning lamp remains permanently on.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-dent occurs.<

Convertible: rollover protection systemThe rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact. The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.

As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-tem ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.

Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In minor accidents, you are protected by the


Tec

hn

olo

gy

for d

rivi

ng

co

mfo

rt a

nd

saf

ety

96

fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<

ResettingIf the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.

1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.

2. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.

3. Release the locking lever.

4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.

5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-tion bar.

Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.

Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the

activated position.Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling.

Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center.Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation.To check the system and ensure flawless long-term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 76.<


Co

ntr

ols

97

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lamps off and daytime running lamps

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps

2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run-ning lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive Head Light*

Parking lampsIn switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

The parking lamps will discharge the bat-tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-tery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 99.<

Low beamsThe low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

If the light switch remains in position 2, the exterior lamps are switched off automatically if the driver's door is opened while the ignition is off.

If necessary, switch on the parking lamps as described in the section about parking lamps.

Automatic headlamp control*If the daytime running lamps are activated, refer to page 98, they are switched on when the light switch is in position 3 and the ignition is on. Depending on ambient light conditions, the low beams are switched on automatically, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on.

When driving into tunnels with bright overhead lights, there may be a delay before the head-lamps come on.The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low beams remain switched on inde-pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<

If desired, the light switch can remain in position 3. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.<

Adjusting sensitivityYou can program how sensitively the system reacts to ambient light.







Lam

ps

98

5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

6. Select "Auto. headlamps" and press the controller.


> "Sensitive"

> "Normal"

> "Slower"


Welcome lampsIf you leave the light switch in the low-beam or automatic headlamp control position when you switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.

Pathway lightingIf you activate the headlamp flasher after park-ing the car, with the lights switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

You can adjust the operating period or deacti-vate the function.






6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to select the corre-sponding duration.


Daytime running lampsThe daytime running lamps come on in lamps-off, parking lamps or automatic headlamp con-trol position. The light output is lower than with the low-beam headlamps.

If desired, the light switch can remain in auto-matic headlamp control position. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked. If the light switch remains in parking lamps posi-tion, the parking lamps are lit after the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps*1. Open the start menu.






Co

ntr

ols

99

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.

The daytime running lamps are switched on.

Adaptive Head Light*

The conceptAdaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.

Activating Adaptive Head LightWith the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to the automatic headlamp control posi-tion, refer to page 97. The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front pas-senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-nating lamps are active and switched on on both sides.

MalfunctionThe LED next to the symbol for automatic head-lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is

malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps*

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.

Switching onAfter parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching offBriefly press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.


Lam

ps

100

Fog lamps

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-sion, the fog lamps are switched off when you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams*.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti-vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lightingYou can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-play, accompanied by the brightness set-ting and scale the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.

4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.The display again shows the outside tem-perature and the time.

Interior lampsThe interior lamps, including the footwell lamps*, the cargo-bay lamp and the courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about

15 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 57.<

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Interior lamps, front and rear*:To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the interior lamps permanently, press the button for the front interior lamp for about 3 seconds.


Co

ntr

ols

101

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Reading lamps

There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.


Clim

ate

102

Climate

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 105

3 Air to the footwell

4 Air distribution, manual

5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of passenger compartment

6 Maximum cooling

7 AUTO program

8 Air flow rate, manual

9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/Recirculated-air mode

10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side of passenger compartment

11 Residual heat

12 Defrosting windows and removing conden-sation

13 Switching cooling function on/off manually

14 Rear window defroster

15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor – please keep clear and unobstructed

The current setting for the air distribution is dis-played on the Control Display, refer to page 103.


Co

ntr

ols

103

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climateAUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort-able for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 28.

Adjusting air distribution manuallyThe air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment is deactivated.

You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button. This automatically switches on the cooling function as well.

Fine adjustments to manual air distributionYou can set the rate of incoming airflow for manual air distribution.



2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-mate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-troller.

4. Select the desired field.

5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution.

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area

3 Air to the footwell

TemperatureSet the desired temperatures indi-vidually for the driver's and front passenger's sides.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-ble regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

When you switch between different tem-perature settings in quick succession, the

automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.<


Clim

ate

104

Maximum coolingAt outside temperatures above 327/06 and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.

The automatic climate control switches to the lowest temperature and operates in recircu-lated-air mode. Air flows at maximum rate only from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cool-ing.

AUTO programThe AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side windows, towards the upper

body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window condensation.

The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO programYou can set the intensity of the air supply in the AUTO program. This changes the duration of time during which the vehicle interior is heated or cooled.


2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-mate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the controller.

The selected intensity level of the auto-matic program is switched on.

Convertible programWhen the hardtop is open, the Convertible pro-gram is selectable as well. In the Convertible program, the automatic climate control is opti-mized for driving with the hardtop open. In addi-tion, the air flow rate is increased as vehicle speed increases.

When the Convertible program has been selected, it is automatically activated every time the hardtop is opened.

The effectiveness of the Convertible pro-gram can be enhanced considerably by

installing the wind deflector.<

Adjusting air flow rate manuallyPress the left side of the button to reduce airflow. Press the right side of the button to increase it.

You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.

Switching the system on/offWith the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the auto-matic climate control. All indicators go out.

Press any button except REST to reactivate the automatic climate control.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/Recirculated-air mode

Switch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly:

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-essary, the system blocks the supply of out-side air and recirculates the inside air. As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently, the system automatically switches back to outside air supply.


Co

ntr

ols

105

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation

in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, otherwise the air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin-uously.<

Via the button* on the steering wheelYou can switch quickly between the recircu-lated-air mode and the previous mode using an individually programmable button on the steer-ing wheel, refer to page 11.

Residual heatThe heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com-partment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.

The function can be switched on when the fol-lowing conditions are met:

> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off

> While the engine is at operating tempera-ture

> As long as battery voltage is sufficient

> At an outside temperature below 777/256

The LED is lit when the function is on.

As of radio readiness, you can set the interior temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-bution.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly removes ice and conden-sation from the windshield and front side windows.

Switching cooling function on/offThe cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as

required, according to the temperature setting. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program. The passen-ger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Rear window defrosterThe defroster switches off auto-matically after a certain time.

Ventilation

1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from the vents for the upper body area

Ventilation for coolingAdjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilationSet the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.


Clim

ate

106

Ventilation in the rear

1 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper-ature

> Turn toward blue: colder

> Turn toward red: warmer

2 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open and close the air vents

3 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance. You can call up further information in the service requirements display, refer to page 76.

Parked car ventilation

The conceptThe parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.

The parked car ventilation remains switched on for 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The system can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driv-ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.

The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directlyiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.



3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.

The parked car ventilation is switched on. The symbol on the automatic climate control

display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on timesiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.



3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-troller.


Co

ntr

ols

107

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller. The first time setting is selected.


8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating switch-on timesMove the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-troller.

The switch-on time is activated. The symbol on the automatic climate control

display lights up.

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system only switches on within the next 24 hours. After these have

elapsed, it must be reactivated.<


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

108

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The conceptThe integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit-ters for various remote-controlled devices, such as door openers and house alarm sys-tems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem-ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-mission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 109.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo-ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Com-ply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibilityIf this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.You can also obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

2. When starting operation for the first time: Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. The three memory buttons are cleared.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-onds, alter the distance.

5. To program other original hand-held trans-mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.


Co

ntr

ols

109

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device while the ignition is switched off.

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit-ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short while and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternat-ing-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmittersTo program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization.When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting stored programsPress both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly: all stored programs are deleted.

It is not possible to clear individual memory but-tons.

Digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating principleYou can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering

> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

110

Setting compass zonesSet the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the com-

pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones below.

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre-sponding to your current location.

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compassThe digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> An incorrect compass direction is shown.

> The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.

> Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are in the vicinity of

your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.

3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km/h.If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steeringYour digital compass is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Setting the languageYou can set the language of the display:

Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.


Co

ntr

ols

111

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Coupe:Roller sun blind*

Tap the button in the center console to raise or lower the roller sun blind.

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment comes on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci-dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

ClosingFold cover up.

LockingTo lock the glove compartment, use the inte-grated key of the remote control, refer to page 28.

Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the outside, the glove compartment is locked as well.

Rechargeable flashlightIt is on the left-hand side of the glove compart-ment. The flashlight can remain plugged in. Whenever required, pull the flashlight out of its socket.

Only insert the flashlight back into the socket when it is switched off, otherwise

there is a risk of damage.<

Center armrest

Storage compartmentThe center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*, depending on the equip-ment version. For more information about this mobile phone base plate refer to the separate Owner's Manual.

Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the outside, the center armrest is locked as well.

OpeningPress the button, see arrow.


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

112

Ventilated storage compartment

The storage compartment in the center armrest can be ventilated: slide the switch backwards.

The temperature is controlled via the knurled wheel for adjusting the temperature of air venti-lating the rear of the passenger compartment, refer to page 106.

Connection for external audio deviceYou can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, refer to page 174.

Storage compartments inside the vehicleDepending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find compartments beside the steering col-umn*, in the front doors and in the center con-sole*. The front-seat backrests are equipped with nets.

Storage compartments in the rear consoleDepending on your vehicle's equipment ver-sion, the following storage compartments can be found in the rear console:

> Storage tray

> Storage compartment with cover

> Cup holders

Coupe:Clothes hooks

Press the upper edge to flip open.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do

not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other-wise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-ing.<

Cup holdersUse lightweight and shatterproof contain-ers and do not transport hot beverages,

otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force contain-ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth-erwise damage could result.<


Co

ntr

ols

113

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Front

OpeningBriefly press the center of the cover.

ClosingBriefly press the cover in the center and push in the cup holder.

Coupe: rearThere are two additional cup holders in the rear center armrest.

Press the front of the armrest.

Convertible: rearThere are two additional cup holders in the rear console.

Press the button to open.

Before folding down the rear seat back-rest or using the transport bag, remove all

containers from the cup holder and close it. Do not place objects into the cup holder and use force to close it. Do not use the cup holder as a grab handle.<

Ashtray, front

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

114

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Ashtray, rear

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

EmptyingLift out the insert.

Connecting electrical appliancesIn your BMW, you can use electrical devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid dam-aging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket*To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter out of the socket.

Socket in the center armrestExternal audio device, refer to page 112.

Coupe: socket in the cargo bay*

Open the cap.

Coupe:Through-loading system*

Opening

1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo bay.

2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.

ClosingReturn the rear seat backrest to its upright posi-tion and engage it.


Co

ntr

ols

115

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

When returning the backrest into its seat-ing position, make sure that the seat's

locking mechanism engages properly. Other-wise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.<

The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo-bay nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 125.

Convertible:Cargo loading

Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo

bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi-cle.<

Enlarging the cargo bay

When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the cargo bay:To do so, push the cargo bay partition upward.

Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo bay partition down until it engages on both sides.

Before moving the hardtop, ensure that there are no objects on or next to the

cargo bay partition, otherwise parts of the hard-top may be damaged. Do not exceed the maxi-mum loading height; refer to the sticker in the cargo bay showing a line indicating the maxi-mum height. Do not use force to push down the cargo bay partition.<

The retractable hardtop can only be opened if the cargo bay partition is in its

lowermost position and engaged on both sides.<

Folding down the rear seat backrest

You can fold down the rear seat backrest to transport light objects in the rear without dam-aging the seats. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mounting points for the cargo-bay net* are found on the back of the seat back-rest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the button on the driver's or the opposite side.

Bag holder*

When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you will find two bag holders on the cargo bay wall.

1. Fold open the holder by pressing the but-ton.

2. Press the handles of the bag onto the holder from above.

Only hang light shopping bags or other suitable objects from the holders, other-

wise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<

For more information on loading the vehicle, refer to page 124.


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

116

Storage compartment behind the rear seat backrest

A storage compartment is located behind the rear seat backrest. To access the storage com-partment: remove the insert or fold down the rear seat backrest.

When the rear seat backrest is folded down or the insert has been removed,

only transport small light objects in the storage compartment, otherwise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compart-ment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<

Storage compartments inside the cargo bay

CoupeDepending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:

> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-sion

> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel

> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags or tote bags

> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella

> Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo bay

ConvertibleDepending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:

> Storage compartment on the left side of the cargo bay. To open turn handle by 90°

> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel

> Rubber band* to be attached to the lateral lashing eyes

> Stowage compartment under the floor panel

Folding up the floor panelDo not exceed the maximum permissible load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-

partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam-age could result.<

CoupePress the floor panel up into the catch and lock the latter.

ConvertibleTo lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the open-ing at the rear of the panel.

Lashing eyesYou will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, refer to page 125.

Coupe: ski bag*Designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.


Co

ntr

ols

117

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Loading1. Fold down the center armrest.

2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover.

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap into the eyelet.

Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bagThe ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-

ter.<

Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag*Designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you can remove the insert and use the transport bag with the regular through-loading opening. To transport larger objects, you can fold down the rear seat backrest to create an expanded through-loading opening.

With the transport bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m. When skis of 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capac-ity of the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered design.


Pra

ctic

al in

teri

or a

cces

sori

es

118

Loading1. For loading using the regular through-load-

ing opening:Press the button down and remove the insert from the front.For loading with the through-loading open-ing expanded:Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 115.

2. Front cover: press the two recesses together and fold the cover down until it engages.

3. In the cargo bay: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.

4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out the transport bag between the front seats.

5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap into the belt buckle under the transport bag.

6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases access to the stored items.

Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

You can use the snaps to shorten the transport bag if you do not need its full length.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the transport bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.


Co

ntr

ols

119

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Removing the front cover

You can remove the front cover to use the full height of the through-loading opening. With the front cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow, and remove the cover toward the front. To replace, insert the cover at an angle from above and let it snap it into place.


Driving tipsThis section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving andoperating conditions.

Driving tips


Th

ing

s to

rem

emb

er w

hen

dri

vin

g

122

Things to remember when driving

Break-in periodMoving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differentialAlways obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDrive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 kmEngine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

TiresDue to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

ClutchThe function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Close the luggage compartment lidOperate the vehicle only when the lug-gage compartment lid is closed. Other-

wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle.<

If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-essary to drive with the luggage compartment lid open:

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

2. Increase the air flow rate of the automatic climate control considerably, refer to page 104.

Hot exhaust systemIn all vehicles, extremely high tempera-tures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-tem, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while park-ing, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<

Mobile phones in the vehicleBMW discourages the use of mobile communications devices, e.g. mobile

phones, inside the vehicle without a direct con-nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communications


Dri

vin

g t

ips

123

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

device can influence one another. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmission will be dissipated from the vehicle interior.<

HydroplaningWhen driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur-face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-mum tread depth on page 211.

Driving through waterDrive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Use the parking brake on inclinesOn inclines, do not hold the vehicle with the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-

wise greater clutch wear will result.<

For more information about the drive-off assis-tant, refer to page 88.

Braking safelyYour BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to

ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

HillsTo prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Down-shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-mission, refer to page 60.

Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in idle or with the

engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise pedal function could be impaired.<

Corrosion on brake rotorsWhen the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.


Th

ing

s to

rem

emb

er w

hen

dri

vin

g

124

When the vehicle is parkedCondensation forms while the automatic cli-mate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car washFor general information about taking care of your BMW, refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

With convenient access and automatic transmissionInsert the remote control into the ignition switch.The engine can be switched off when the selec-tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 37.

Cargo loadingTo avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This can ultimately result in a sudden blow-out.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-gage can be transported.

Stowing cargo> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-

ward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.


Dri

vin

g t

ips

125

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

Coupe

Convertible

Securing cargo

Coupe

Convertible

> Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps, a cargo-bay net* or draw straps*.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two are located on the cargo-bay sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo-bay panel 2.Please comply with the information sup-plied with the cargo straps.

Convertible: before opening the hardtop, fold down the cargo bay partition. Make

sure the cargo bay is loaded correctly, other-wise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer to page 115.<

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 237, as excessive loads can pose a


Th

ing

s to

rem

emb

er w

hen

dri

vin

g

126

safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-tion of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-pants.<

Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack*A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

The mounting points are located in the roof.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rackBecause roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 237.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-ing the glass sunroof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.


Dri

vin

g t

ips

127

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y


NavigationThis chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your routeso that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

Navigation


Sta

rtin

g th

e n

avig

atio

n sy

stem

130

Starting the navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

Navigation DVDThe navigation system requires a special navi-gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at your BMW center.

Inserting navigation DVD

Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up.The navigation DVD is pulled in automati-cally.

2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-tents of the DVD to be read in.

Removing navigation DVD1. Press button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos-sible that it is blocked. A message appears on the Control Display.

Display in the assistance windowYou can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica-tion.

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the assistance window.

2. Press the controller.Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route display or "Current position".


*


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

131

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering a destination by voice com-mands*, refer to page 135

> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 137

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 138

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 139

> Selecting home address, refer to page 141

After selecting your destination you can pro-ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 143.

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.

Operating navigation systemEnter data only when the vehicle is sta-tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi-tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered.<




3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-ler.

Entering a destination manuallyThe system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 142. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

132

controller."New destination" is selected.


3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-troller.

The system also supports you with the follow-ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of country and local-ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Selecting country1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-

played and press the controller.

The list of available countries appears on the display.

2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.

At least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the des-tination guidance.

Entering destination by town/city name1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-

played and press the controller.

2. Select the starting letter and press the con-troller.A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-ter appears on the Control Display.

3. Delete letters, if necessary:

> To delete individual numbers or letters:Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller.

> To delete all numbers or letters:Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller for a longer period.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

133

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

4. If necessary, enter more letters.The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

> To enter spaces, if necessary:Select the symbol and press the con-troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the control-ler until the city or town name is selected from the list and press the controller.

Entering destination by zip code1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Enter the zip code:Select the desired digits and press the con-troller.

> To enter spaces:Select the symbol and press the con-troller.

> To delete individual numbers or letters:Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller.

> To delete all numbers or letters:Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller for a longer period.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller.The corresponding destination is displayed.

4. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the con-troller.

Entering street, house number and intersectionAfter the street you can also enter the intersec-tion or the house number.


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

134

Entering street and intersection1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and


2. Enter the street.The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city.

The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering a town/cityYou can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the designated country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.

1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field.The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until you see a request to enter a street in the country and press the controller.

3. Switch to the second field from the top and enter the street.

Entering a house numberYou can enter any house number stored for the street on the navigation DVD.

1. Select "House number" and press the con-troller.

2. To enter the house number:Select the desired digits and press the con-troller.

3. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.

Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry

> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-troller.Destination guidance starts immediately.

> If you do not want to start destination guid-ance right away:Select "Add to destination list" and press


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

135

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

the controller.The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 138.

Entering a destination by voice commands*You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice command system if necessary.

You can have the possible commands read aloud via {Options}.<


Selecting country1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of

destination.

Say the name of the destination country in the language of the voice command system.

Entering destinationThe destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.

Spelling the destinationTo enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal

volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 destina-tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive:Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Entering the destination as an entire word*Towns/cities and streets located in the region where the language of the voice command sys-tem is spoken can be entered as an entire word.

Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire word, the system language must be English.

A prerequisite is the use of a suitable navigation DVD.

Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and avoid excessive emphases and pauses.

2. {Enter address}

2. Say the name of the destination coun-try.

1. To spell the name of a town/city:Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recog-nize the town/city.

The system suggests a location.

2. Select location:

> To select highlighted town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {No}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> To show other entries in the list: {Next page}

> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

136

1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city of destination.

The system can suggest up to 6 destina-tions that meet your entries.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive:Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-not be distinguished by the system are

compiled in a separate list and shown as a des-tination followed by three dots. If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then select the desired town/city from that list.<

Entering street and house numberThe street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.

To enter the house number:

House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered. Say the house number as individual digits.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Storing destinationsDestinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.

Map-guided destination selectionIf you only know the location of the town or street of destination, you can enter the destina-tion using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to select the destination on the map and then transfer it for destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-ler."New destination" is selected.


3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

2. Say the name of the destination town/city.

The system suggests a location.

3. Select location:

> To select highlighted town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {No}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}

> To enter the town/city by spelling: {Spell}

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination} or{Add to address book}


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

137

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

A section of a map is displayed on the Con-trol Display:

> During destination guidance, around the current destination

> With the destination guidance deacti-vated, around the last destination entered

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> To change scale: turn the controller.

> To move the map: move the controller in the desired direction.The controller can be moved to the left, right, forwards, backwards and also diagonally.

5. Press the controller to transfer the destina-tion for destination guidance or to store it.The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.

> "Show current position" places your current position at the center of the map.

> "Show destination position" places the current destination at the center of the map.

> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".

> Exit the menu.


The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display:Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using informationYou can have a list of selected destinations dis-played, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and transfer them for destination guidance.

1. Select "Information" and press the control-ler.


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

138

2. Select location:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "On a new destination"


4. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-taurants", and press the controller.Destinations are shown on the Control Dis-play.

5. Select a destination and press the control-ler.


> To transfer the address to the destina-tion list and start destination guidance:Select "Select as destination" and press the controller.

> To establish a telephone connection:Select "Call" and press the controller.


Destination listThe last 20 destinations entered into the sys-tem are shown in the destination list. You can call up these destinations and transfer them for

destination guidance.If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-ple, you can store all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destination list in advance, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 131.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list.

This symbol identifies the current destina-tion during destination guidance.

To show other destinations in the destination list:turn the controller.

Transferring destination for destination guidance1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-troller.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

139

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Editing destination list1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

> To store the entry:Select "Add to address book".

> To display information on the destina-tion:Select "Information on destination".

> To delete the entry:Select "Delete entry".

> To delete all entries:Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.

> To change an entry:Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination by town/city name, page 132.


Address book

Opening address bookiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address bookYou can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con-troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-troller.

4. Enter name and address.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the desti-nation list in the address book, refer to page 138.

Storing current position* The current position can be transferred to the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the control-ler.

3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller.The name given can be changed. For oper-


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

140

ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-ally, page 131.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the area covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address book1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.The stored entries appear on the Control Display.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

To start destination guidance:Select "Start guidance" and press the control-ler.

Changing destinations from address book1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.


3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-troller.

4. Change entry.For operation, refer to Entering a destina-tion manually, page 131.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Deleting individual destinations from address book1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.


3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-troller.

Deleting all destinations from address book1. Open the start menu.



4. Select "Vehicle and tires" and press the controller.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

141

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

5. Select "Delete data" and press the control-ler.

6. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.


Home addressYou can store your current position or the cur-rent destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.

Storing home address1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or select "Save current destination" during destination guidance, and press the con-troller.

4. With the Professional navigation system:Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Using home address as destination1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.


Changing home address1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 131.

Route selectionYou can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during des-tination entry or during destination guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navi-gation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

Changing route criteria1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.


Des

tin

atio

n e

ntr

y

142

The various criteria are shown on the Con-trol Display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

> "With highways"Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority.

> "Avoid highways"Highways are avoided as far as possible.

> "Fast route"The fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fast-est roads

> "Short route"Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be


The route criterion is selected.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-terion and then press the controller:

> "Dynamic route"Automatic rerouting due to traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruction.

> "Avoid tollroads"Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.

> "Avoid ferries"Ferries are avoided as far as possible.


The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display.

1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.

2. Select a route criterion and press the con-troller.

Word-matching principleThe system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-paring your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:

> Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "München" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identifica-tion.

> The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored on the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone-ous or unregistered names is impossible.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

143

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidanceiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.

2. Select the destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 131.


After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-play on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display:Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive. You will be notified in time of any necessary change of direction by means of spoken

instructions and the display of the direction arrows.

Via programmable memory keys ... Press the key on which the

desired destination has been stored, refer also to page 21.

Terminating/continuing destination guidance

In the arrow or map display

Select the symbol and press the controller.

In the destination list This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion.

1. Select the current destination and press the controller.


Des

tin

atio

n g

uid

ance

144


If you did not reach the destination before the end of the last journey, the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next journey:"Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.

To start destination guidance immediately:Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Route displayYou can have the route during destination guid-ance displayed in various ways.

From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer

to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<

Arrow display1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until

"Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is shown.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Selecting route criteria

3 Starting/stopping destination guidance

4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

5 Distance to the next change of direction

6 Current location

7 Direction of travel

> Outline of an arrow:Destination guidance on the calculated route

> Solid arrow:Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal-culated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.

The arrows change appearance before a change of direction.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

145

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance to change of direction

3 Change of direction


Map displayYou can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.


2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map display is selected:

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"


1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Starting/stopping destination guidance

3 Map-guided destination selection

4 Showing/hiding information last selected, refer to Selecting destination using infor-mation on page 137

5 Changing map display

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6 Changing route criteria

7 Calling up traffic information* manually

8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display.


At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north, toward your current direction of travel, or show the map in perspective. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.

Changing map display

Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller.The next map display is displayed.

Changing scaleTurn the controller to adjust the scale.


Des

tin

atio

n g

uid

ance

146

Displaying towns/cities and streets along the routeYou can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance.

The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also displayed.


2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the con-troller.


Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map display:Select the symbol and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on/off at any time:




4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

147

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Repeating or canceling voice instructionsWith the programmable buttons on the steering wheel, you can also execute the following func-tions, refer to page 53:

> Repeat the voice instruction:Press the button.

> Switch voice instructions on/off:Press the button for a longer period.

Adjusting volume for voice instructionsThe volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.


Changing a routeDuring destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.


2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the route:Select the arrow and press the controller.

Traffic information*In metropolitan areas where traffic information is transmitted by radio stations, you can have the navigation system display information from the Traffic Info warning service. This informa-tion is continually updated with the help of mea-surement data from traffic control centers and messages from traffic observers. During destination guidance, the traffic infor-mation relevant to the route you are currently taking is automatically shown. Irrespective of whether destination guidance is active, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map display or as an event list.

Switching reception of traffic information on/offiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.




Des

tin

atio

n g

uid

ance

148


4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-ler.

The traffic information can be transmitted and displayed.

"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the best reception.

Depending on the station, either the sta-tion name, frequency, local number or

other information is displayed.<

Calling up traffic information manually

During destination guidance During destination guidance, traffic information can be called up manually in the arrow or map display.

If the symbol is shown with a red border, there is traffic information regarding the planned route.

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, traffic information along the planned route is indicated by yellow diamonds.

Current traffic information is shown on the Con-trol Display, sorted by distance from the vehi-cle's current position.

With destination guidance switched off1. Open the start menu.



Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

149

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-ler.

Current traffic information is shown on the Con-trol Display, sorted by distance from the vehi-cle's current position.

Displaying detailed traffic informationSelect a traffic information item from the list and press the controller.


Displaying traffic information in the map displayThe traffic information symbols are shown in the map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.

With a scale up to 5 miles/10 km, additional information is shown. The length, direction and severity of a traffic obstruction are indicated by means of arrows along the route, for example:

On the planned routeTraffic information icon is displayed on yellow.

Outside of the planned route> Map scale up to 5 miles/10 km:

Traffic information icon is displayed on white with a black or gray border

> Map scale larger than 10 miles/20 km:An arrow pointing in the relevant direction is

Traffic event displayed with map scales larger than 5 miles/10 km; arrow points in relevant direction of travel

There are several traffic events. Switch to a smaller map scale to show more detail.

Slow traffic or other traffic event

Traffic backup

Stopped traffic

Stopped traffic in both directions


Des

tin

atio

n g

uid

ance

150

displayed on white with a black or gray bor-der

Traffic information during destination guidanceDepending on whether "Dynamic route" is selected, system response varies:

> "Dynamic route" not selected:When the navigation system receives a traf-fic obstruction message, you receive cer-tain information, such as the extent of the traffic congestion, when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away from the traffic obstruction.The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.

> "Dynamic route" selected:In case of a traffic obstruction the guided route is adapted automatically. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruc-tion.

This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Driving around a traffic congestion

Select "Detour" and press the controller.The navigation system calculates a new route to avoid the congestion.

Traffic information icons

Traffic light failure

Roadworks

General traffic obstructionTransport of hazardous load

Danger

Low clearance

No parking

Fog

Heavy rain

Slippery road

Cross winds

Smog

Road closed

Slow traffic

Traffic backup

Stopped traffic

Icy roads

Uneven surface

Accident

Lane closure

Delay

Police checkpoint


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

151

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Displaying current positionYou can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.


2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur-rent position" is selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.


You can also have the current position dis-played on a map, refer to page 145.


Wh

at to

do

if …

152

What to do if …

What to do if …

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-trol Display?The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This infor-mation is indicated on the DVD label.

> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-play?The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your current position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed when you are in the open.

> the destination guidance does not accept a destination?The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a destination as close as possible to the orig-inal one.

> the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name?On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guid-ance.

> you want to enter a destination for the des-tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry?The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let-ters to choose from. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec-tions?You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga-

tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.

> the navigation system does not react to entries?If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.


Na

vig

ati

on

Dri

vin

g t

ips

153

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y


EntertainmentOperation of the radio and CD equipment as

well as their tone settings are described in thischapter.

Entertainment


On

/off

an

d s

etti

ng

s

156

On/off and settings

The following audio sources have shared con-trols and setting options:

> Radio

> CD player

> CD changer*

ControlsThe audio sources can be operated using:

> Buttons near the CD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11

> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21

Buttons on the CD player

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-ume

> Press: switch on/off.When you switch on, the last set radio station or CD track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

2 Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Select track for CD player and CD changer.

5 Drive for navigation DVD

Operation via iDriveiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.


2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

You have the following choices:

> "FM" and "AM": radio reception

> "SAT": satellite radio*> "CD": CD player or changer

> "AUX": external audio device

> "Set": depending on the audio source, other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sam-ple stations.

From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer

to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching on/offIn order to switch the entertainment sound out-put on and off:Press button 1 on the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi-cates that sound output is switched off.


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

157

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

Adjusting volumeTurn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the setting is stored for the remote control cur-rently in use.

Tone controlYou can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing tone settings1. Press the button.




4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected if you have called up "Entertainment" in the start menu:Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the controller after each selection.

Treble and bass1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-

troller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

Balance and faderYou can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume controlThe speed-dependent volume control auto-matically increases the volume with increasing driving speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.


On

/off

an

d s

etti

ng

s

158

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-troller.

2. Turn the controller:The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges.

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller.LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.

To switch off the spatial sound effect:Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Equalizer*You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

159

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

Resetting tone settingsYou can reset all tone settings to the default setting.




4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Reset" is selected and press the con-troller.

6. In vehicles equipped with two drives:Select "Yes" and press the controller.


Rad

io

160

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.

Listening to the radio

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.




3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".


Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-sets".

If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable, update the stations with the best reception, refer to page 161.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the corre-

sponding direction.The system switches to the next displayed sta-tion.You can also change the station with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Changing selection criteriaIn addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "All stations":Stations that can currently be received on the "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore":Stations with the best reception in the "AM" waveband.

> "Presets":Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 162.

To change the selection criterion:


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

161

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

1. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

2. Choose a selection criterion and press the controller.

Sampling stations, scanThe stations on the current waveband are auto-matically sampled in succession.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-ler."Set" is selected.


3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

Stop sampling:



Station sampling is interrupted and the selected station stays on.

Buttons on the CD player To sample stations, press the but-

ton for the corresponding direction for an extended time.

To stop scanning, press the button again.

Selecting the frequency manuallyWith "Manual" you can select stations with reception other than those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-ler.


3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-quency.

Updating stations with best receptionIf on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals in the AM waveband.

1. Select "AM" and press the controller.


3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller."Set" is selected.



Rad

io

162

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.

Storing stations1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is chosen and press the controller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station."Set" is selected.


5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-ory location is selected.

7. Press the controller.The station is stored.

The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via programmable memory keysYou can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer also to page 21.

1. Select a station.

2. Press the desired key ... for a longer period.

Changing a memory position1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station."Set" is selected.



Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

163

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y


5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-ory location is selected.The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

6. Press the controller.The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data SystemIn the FM waveband, RDS transmits additional information. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Con-trol Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the dis-play.

Switching RDS on/off*1. Select "FM" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.


3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.


Sat

ellit

e ra

dio

164

Satellite radio

You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in

audio interruptions.<

Enabling or disabling channelsiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.



3. Select "SAT".


The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.

Enabling1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller.A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is required to enable or disable.<

2. To enable the channel:Dial the phone number.

Disabling1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-played.

The electronic serial number is required to disable.<

3. To disable the channel:Dial the phone number.

*


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

165

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

Selecting and storing a channel1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels are shown on the Control Display sorted on the basis of selection criteria.


> "Presets":Up to twelve channels you stored previ-ously.

> "All channels":All channels are displayed.

> "Categories": All channels, sorted by category, e.g. news, jazz.


4. If "Categories" has been selected:Select the desired category and press the controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym-bol.


7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional informationThe name of the channel and additional infor-mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.


Sat

ellit

e ra

dio

166

1 Artist

2 Track

Storing a channel1. Select the desired channel.



"Presets" is displayed.

4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

Changing channels with buttons on CD player

Press the button for the corre-sponding direction.The system switches to the next enabled chan-nel.

NotesIf no signal can be received for more than four seconds, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-ing on environmental influences or topo-

graphic conditions, it may not be possible to receive any signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.A signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise build-ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference.Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig-nal becomes available again.<


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

167

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Compressed audio files*CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.

Starting the CD playerThe upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive:




3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. On cars with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out-put is switched on.

Via programmable memory keysYou can store the CD player function on the programmable memory keys to start the CD player, refer to page 21.

Starting the CD changerFill and insert the CD magazine, refer to page 171.



*


CD

pla

yer a

nd

CD

ch

ang

er

168

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select the desired CD and press the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD is selected and played.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.

The CD magazine's load status is indicated on the Control Display.

Via programmable memory keysYou can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory keys to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.

Selecting a track

Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the appropriate

direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive

Turn the controller to select a track.

Compressed audio files*1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press

the controller.

2. Select a track and press the controller.

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

169

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

To change the directory:Select the directory and press the controller.


If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you can save specific tracks on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.

Displaying information about the track*With compressed audio files, any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.


2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is shown for the current track.


Sampling tracks, ScanAll tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.Other menu items are displayed.


Stop sampling:



Track sampling is interrupted and the selected track is played on.


CD

pla

yer a

nd

CD

ch

ang

er

170

Compressed audio files*1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.


> To sample all the tracks in the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.

> To sample all the tracks on the CD, select "Scan all" and press the control-ler.

Stop sampling:


2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.

Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained.

Repeating tracks1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

Stop repeating:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.


troller.


> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.

> To repeat all the tracks in the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Stop repeating:


2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Random play sequenceThe tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

171

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Stop random function:


2. Select "Random" and press the controller.


troller.


> To play all the tracks in the current direc-tory in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.

> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran-dom order, select "Random all" and press the controller.

Stop random function:

1. Press the controller

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverseButtons on the CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.

CD magazine

Coupe

Convertible

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo bay.

Removing the CD magazineTo insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.

2. Press the button, arrow 2.The CD magazine is ejected.


CD

pla

yer a

nd

CD

ch

ang

er

172

Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Inserting CDs:Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on top.

Removing CDs:Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and remove the CD.

Inserting the CD magazine

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

NotesBMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result.Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause

irreparable damage to the device.Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject.Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctionsBMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

HumidityHigh levels of humidity can lead to condensa-tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDsIf malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDsPossible reasons for malfunctions with self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damage preventionAvoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protectionCDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

173

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y

DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

CareClean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially avail-able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards. For more informa-tion on taking care of CDs/DVDs please refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.


Ext

ern

al a

ud

io d

evic

e

174

External audio device

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

ConnectingLift up the center armrest.

1 Power supply for your external audio device:Socket with removable cap

2 Connection for audio playback:jack plug, 3.5 mm

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to connection 2.

Starting audio playbackThe audio device must be switched on.


1. Press the button.



3. Select "AUX" and press the controller.

4. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.

Via programmable memory keysYou can store the external audio device function on the programmable memory keys to start audio playback, refer to page 21.


Na

vig

ati

on

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Dri

vin

g t

ips

175

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsC

omm

unic

atio

nsM

ob

ilit

y


CommunicationsThis chapter describes how to use the

telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.

Communications


Tel

epho

nin

g

178

Telephoning

The conceptYour BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands.

Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-ning or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.

Using the telephone inside the vehicle

Using the snap-in adapter*The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent repro-duction quality. Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

BMW discourages the use of mobile phones or other mobile communications

devices inside the vehicle without a direct con-nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, inter-ference between vehicle electronics systems and the mobile communications device cannot be ruled out. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmis-sion will be dissipated from the vehicle inte-rior.<

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-erwise malfunctions may result.

For your safetyA car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed description of safety precautions and informa-tion, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situa-tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the

mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis-tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Suitable mobile phonesPlease ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and/or which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones sup-port the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.

Care instructionsYou can find what you need to know about car-ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile phone Owner's Manual.

Operating optionsYou can operate the mobile phone using:

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10

> iDrive, refer to page 183

> Voice commands, refer to page 187

*


179

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21

Making phone calls with the BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist callsYou can use the BMW Assist System via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "BMW Assist" or "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con-nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.

Start-up

Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicleThe following prerequisites must be met:

> The mobile phone is compatible: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone preparation package.

> The mobile phone is ready to operate.

> The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi-cle, refer to page 182, and in the mobile phone.

> Depending on the mobile phone, some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone: e.g. via the menu item Blue-tooth switched on or the menu item Con-nection without confirmation.

> Depending on the mobile phone type, the power-saving mode setting, for example, may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle.

> For pairing purposes, define any number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-tooth passkey is no longer required after pairing has been successful.

> The ignition is switched on.

Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid

endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Switch on ignition1. Insert remote control all the way into the

ignition lock.

2. Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.

Preparation via iDriveiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

3. Press the button to call up the start menu.



6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.



Tel

epho

nin

g

180

until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

8. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

Preparation via the mobile phone9. Further steps must be carried out with the

mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Con-necting or Pairing.

PairingDepending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first in the mobile phone's display or on the Control Display, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously deter-mined by you.

Message on the Control Display if the Bluetooth passkey can be entered via iDrive:

10. Select "Add device" and press the control-ler.

11. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.

12. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.

13. Wait several seconds until the list of paired mobile phones is displayed on the Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

To interrupt the mobile phone's pairing with the vehicle:Select "Refuse connection" and press the con-troller.

The next time you use the mobile phone inside the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-ted to the vehicle. Refer also to your mobile phone's operating instructions, if necessary. This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several minutes; please


181

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

refer to your mobile phone's operating instruc-tions, if necessary.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired, the pairing data for the last mobile phone on the list is deleted, refer also to the information below.

List of paired mobile phonesAll mobile phones with pairing data stored by the vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile phones are detected by the vehicle at the same time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can be operated via the vehicle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile phones via the vehicle.






5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.


7. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

8. Select "Move device up" and press the con-troller.

The selected mobile phone moves up one position on the list.

Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicleShould you no longer wish to operate your mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile phone's pairing data.






5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.


7. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-troller.The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list.The phone book entries which were trans-


Tel

epho

nin

g

182

ferred from your mobile phone to the vehi-cle are also deleted in the process.

Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link

The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all

applicable local regulations. You can tempo-rarily disconnect the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary.<

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Take the mobile phone out of the snap-in adapter and switch it off.






until "Bluetooth" is selected and press the controller.

7. Select "Settings" and press the controller. The Bluetooth link is activated.

8. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac-tivate the link.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main-tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.



183

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Operation via iDriveYou can operate the following functions using iDrive:

> Accepting a call

> Dialing phone numbers

> Selecting phone numbers from the phone book

> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls

> Ending a call

When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.

Voice qualityIf the person you are talking to is having difficul-ties understanding you, this may be due to excessive background noise. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or by pointing the front air vents downward.

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-tem.

RequirementsThe mobile phone's pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.

The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.


1. Press the button.


2. Move the controller forwards to call up "Communication".

Receiving callsIf you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num-ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Rejecting a callSelect "Reject" and press the controller.The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.


Tel

epho

nin

g

184

Calling

Dialing phone numbers1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by select-ing the digits individually and pressing the controller.Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number.The letters correspond to the numbers on the keypad of the mobile phone.

To delete an incorrect number or letter:Move the controller towards the right to select , and press the controller.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-ler.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.

Calling via programmable memory keysYou can store phone numbers on the program-mable memory keys to call these numbers directly, refer to page 21.

Ending a call1. Select the phone number and press the

controller.

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Selecting a phone number from the phone book or from a list of stored phone numbersPhone numbers you have dialed, received calls and phone book entries are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.

You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.

Five lists are available:

> "A - Z" The entries in your mobile phone's phone book, consisting of names and phone num-bers, are sorted alphabetically.

> "Top 8"The eight numbers dialed most frequently from the "A - Z" phone book are automati-cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is sorted by frequency.


185

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

> "Redial"The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.

> "Missed calls"The phone numbers of the last eight rejected calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.

> "Received calls"The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.

Selecting phone numbers from phone bookThe "A - Z" list is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.


2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the first letter of the desired entry and press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con-troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller.The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.

You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:


2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.


4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-ler.

Dialing stored phone numbers from a listTo select an entry and establish a connection:


2. Select a list and press the controller:

> "Top 8"

> "Redial"

> "Missed calls"

> "Received calls"


Tel

epho

nin

g

186


4. Select "Call" and press the controller.The system dials the number.

Deleting an individual entry1. Select the desired entry from the list and


2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.The entry is deleted.

Deleting the entire list1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. If applicable, select "Yes"and press the controller.The list is deleted.

BMW Contact*If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you, you can have several service numbers dis-played:

> BMW Roadside Assistance* if you need help in the event of a breakdown

> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser-vice appointment, for example

> BMW Customer Relations* for information related to your vehicle

You can dial the displayed service numbers if your mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.



2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.


187

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:

> "Roadside Assistance"

> "Customer Relations"

> "Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact will be established.

Dialing phone numbers via touch tonesTouch-tone dialing is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. for remote querying on an answering machine.

This function is available whenever there is a connection.

1. Establish connection.

2. Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.

3. Select the desired touch-tone character and press the controller.Each selection is transmitted immediately and is confirmed by a tone, depending on the type of mobile phone you are using.

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free systemYou can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.

With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:

> Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, you can continue the conversa-tion via the hands-free system, if necessary. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

> Press the button above the storage compartment. The changeover can take several seconds.

From hands-free system to mobile phoneIf you are making a call via the hands-free sys-tem, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone, if necessary, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may occur that calls are switched from the hands-free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor.

Operation by voice commands*

The conceptYou can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel. During your entries, you will be guided in many cases by announcements and questions.


Tel

epho

nin

g

188

The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 183.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Saying commands

Activating the system1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

A sound signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command.The text or numbers that the voice com-mand system has registered will appear on the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice commandsBriefly press the button on the steering wheelor

In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name rather than a command, canceling is only possi-ble using the button on the steering wheel.

Having the possible commands read aloudThe system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:

Using alternative commandsOften there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

{...}Say the specified commands word for word.{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

{Cancel}.

{Help}

{Dial name} or {Name}.


189

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Example: dialing phone numbersStart the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting volumeYou can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Turn the button during an instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini-mum volume.


Calling

Dialing phone numbers

Correcting phone numbersAfter the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting entry{Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered so far.

Voice phone bookThe phone book entries can be called up auto-matically from your mobile phone's memory.

Command Response

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or{{123 456 7890. And next?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}.The dialog for establishing a telephone connection is opened.

2. Say the phone number.For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.

3. {Dial}.The connection to the desired sub-scriber is established.

{Correct number}.The digits are deleted.


Tel

epho

nin

g

190

Selecting an entryThe connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

RedialingThe {Redial} command calls up "Redial".

NotesThe commands in English were available as of this printing. Other languages are

currently in preparation. To operate the mobile phone via the voice command system, refer to page 23.<

Important for voice commandsFor voice commands, bear in mind the follow-ing:

> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-ses and pauses.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Inserting/removing snap-in adapter1. Press area 1 around the button and take off

the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter:Press area 1 around the button.

Inserting mobile phone1. If applicable, remove the protective cap

from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical con-

1. {Dial name}.The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.


191

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

tact points and press it downward until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-ing is unlocked.

To conserve battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone when the

ignition is switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press the button.


BM

W A

ssis

t

192

BMW Assist

BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an emergency call* has been initiated.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-vidually agreed contract.

After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you hav-ing to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist service will be available. The BMW Assist sys-tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

RequirementsYou can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met:

> The installed BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser-vices.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

> A GPS signal must be available in order for BMW Assist to be activated and updated.

> You have signed the BMW Assist service contract with your BMW center or BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.

> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 197.

Offered servicesThe following services are available via BMW Assist:

> Emergency Request, refer to page 227: When you press the SOS button, a connec-tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist

Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

> Automatic Collision Notification:Under certain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.

> Customer Relations: For all information related to your vehicle you can be connected with BMW Customer Relations.

> TeleService: Data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

> Remote Door Unlock: Contact the BMW Assist Response Center if your remote control or key is not available and you would like to have the vehicle unlocked.

> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: After you report your vehicle stolen with the police, call the BMW Assist Response Cen-ter to determine its position.

In addition, other services can be provided to you, such as the Concierge service or informa-tion on directions, traffic or the weather.Press the SOS button in order to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.

You can also access BMW Assist Concierge services via the Internet.

*


193

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y

Characteristics of the offered servicesThe following characteristics apply to the ser-vices:

> The services offered are country-specific.

> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.

> The data transmitted can be vehicle data, for example, your current position or the Condition Based Service CBS data.

Using services

Contacting the BMW Assist Response CenterYou can establish contact with the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button.

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open. The arrangement of the switches and indi-cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle equipment versions.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.

Roadside AssistanceiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.



3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.

If the current location can be determined, the current vehicle position is displayed.

5. Select "Start service" and press the con-troller.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.


BM

W A

ssis

t

194

TeleService

Automatic service notification*The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto-matically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified.






6. Select "Service notification" and press the controller.

Manual service notificationYou can transmit data regarding your vehicle's service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment.




4. Select "Service Request"



195

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y


The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser-vice appointment.

Contacting BMW Customer RelationsFor all information related to your vehicle you can call BMW Customer Relations.




4. Select "Customer Relations".



The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Customer Relations.

Concierge service*When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you can obtain information about, e.g., current events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service.

Concierge service requires additional enabling by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Calling the Concierge1. Press the button.




4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-ler.

5. Select "New data request" and press the controller.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist Concierge.


BM

W A

ssis

t

196

Displaying transmitted dataSelect a received message, if applicable, and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance1. Select "Options" and press the controller.


> Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A pre-requisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.

> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti-nation guidance.

Adapting BMW Assist

Displaying and updating servicesIf the services offered by BMW Assist change, you will be notified. In that event you may update the service functions.




4. Turn the controller until "BMW Services" is selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.The currently available BMW Assist ser-vices are displayed.

6. If necessary, select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.

Terminating services*When you terminate the services, the connec-tion to BMW Assist is deactivated.


197

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y





5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.

BMW Assist is blocked from use, and your vehi-cle's current position will not be transmitted during an emergency call*. To unblock the ser-vices, reactivate BMW Assist, see below. The contractual agreement is not affected by this.

Reactivate BMW Assist, if necessary, to log on again.

Activating BMW AssistBMW Assist must be activated to use the ser-vices.

Requirements> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current location. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during the activation process.

Activating1. Press the button.







BM

W A

ssis

t

198

until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-troller. BMW Assist is activated and data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.

Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues in the background.

Displaying vehicle dataWhen BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle may be displayed.




4. Select "BMW Services" and press the con-troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Profile" is selected and press the con-troller.


199

En

tert

ain

me

nt

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nM

ob

ilit

y


MobilityThis section helps you maintain your car's

mobility by supplying important informationon vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance andbreakdown assistance.

Mobility


Ref

uel

ing

202

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu-eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to

the tank and a message will be displayed.<

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<

Gas cap

Opening

1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.

2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

ClosingFit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not jam the strap between the gas cap and the vehicle. Otherwise fuel vapors

could escape. A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler doorIn the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:

Coupe

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-wall of the cargo bay.

2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.

Convertible

1. Loosen the right-hand cargo bay trim panel by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.

2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is not necessary to remove the entire panel.

3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.

Observe the following when refuelingWhen handling fuels always observe any safety guidelines posted at the service

station.<

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

> premature pump shutoff


Mo

bil

ity

203

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacityApprox. 16.1 US gallons/61 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.



Fuel specificationsDo not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the

catalytic converter.Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be dam-aged.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:

> 328i/xi: 87

> 335i: 89.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Do not use any gasoline below the speci-fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the

engine could be damaged.<

Use high-quality brandsField experience has indicated significant dif-ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other

oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental condi-tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<


Wh

eels

an

d ti

res

204

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safetyIt is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-tion that can not only compromise your vehi-cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

Checking pressureOnly check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After correcting tire inflation pressures, always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,

refer to page 89.<

Inflation pressure specificationsThe tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom-

mended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla-tion pressures, observe the following:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Load conditions

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/hFor normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-sures listed on the following pages in the col-umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust

pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-sures listed on the following pages in the col-umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.


Mo

bil

ity

205

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speedsup to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speedsincluding those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package:

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S225/50 R 16 92 H M+S225/45 R 17 91 H M+S225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 36/250

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 33/230 - 32/220 - 33/230 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 38/260 - 35/240 - 38/260

with Sports package:

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 38/260

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 33/230 - 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 38/260 - 35/240 - 41/280

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 237.


Wh

eels

an

d ti

res

206

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi



100 mph / 160 km/h


100 mph / 160 km/h



205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 33/230 - 32/220 - 38/260


205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 42/290

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 33/230 - 35/240 - 41/280



Mo

bil

ity

207

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i



100 mph / 160 km/h


100 mph / 160 km/h



225/45 R 17 91 H M+S225/45 R 17 94 V M+S

32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 38/260

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 39/270 - 33/230 - 39/270


225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 33/240 36/250 44/300

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 38/260 - 42/290

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 35/240 - 38/260

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 39/270 - 38/260 - 42/290



Wh

eels

an

d ti

res

208

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i



100 mph / 160 km/h


100 mph / 160 km/h



205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 32/220 35/240 36/250 44/300

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 32/220 - 39/270

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 35/240 - 42/290

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 32/220 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 36/250 - 44/300


205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 32/220 39/270 41/280 48/330

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 35/240 - 42/290

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 33/230 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 39/270 - 46/320

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 35/240 - 42/290

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 39/270 - 46/320



Mo

bil

ity

209

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i



100 mph / 160 km/h


100 mph / 160 km/h



225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 35/240 - 42/290

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 32/220 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 36/250 - 44/300


225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 33/230 41/280 41/280 48/330

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 39/270 - 46/320

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 35/240 - 42/290

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 39/270 - 46/320



Wh

eels

an

d ti

res

210

Tire identification marksKnowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed code letterQ = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberTires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire ageThe manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT … 3006 means that the tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2006.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mmAspect ratio in ΞRadial belt constructionRim diameter in inchesLoad rating,not on ZR tiresSpeed code letter, infront of the R on ZR tires

225/45 R 17 91 V

e.g.

Manufacturer's code for tire makeTire size and tire designTire age

DOT xxxx xxx 0705


Mo

bil

ity

211

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC – Run-Flat TiresYou will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 212.

M+SWinter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum-mer tires.

XLDesignation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire conditionInspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depthThe tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damagePlease note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-tible to road hazard and consequential dam-ages.Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi-ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants and other road users.<


Wh

eels

an

d ti

res

212

Tire ageFor various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 0705 means that the tire was manufac-tured in week 07 of 2005.

Run-Flat Tires

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric-tions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 90.

New wheels and tiresHave new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-anced.<

Retreaded tiresBMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may

be impaired. The causes for this include poten-tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

Correct wheels and tiresWhen mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, moreover, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends that damaged Run-Flat Tires be replaced

rather than repaired.<

BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-bination at your BMW center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-nation again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronicsWhen mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 90. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.


Mo

bil

ity

213

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Recommended tire brands

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the high-est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tiresBMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speedAlways comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure

to do so could result in tire damage and acci-dents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.

StorageAlways store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Snow chains*Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-turer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading.When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 87.<


Un

der

the

ho

od

214

Under the hood

Do not work on the car unless you pos-sess the necessary technical knowledge.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz-ards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Opening

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may

result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<


Mo

bil

ity

215

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Important parts of the engine compartment

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 217

2 Washer fluid reservoir for headlamp clean-ing system and window washer system, refer to page 63

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 228

4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

Engine oilThe engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking oil levelYour car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

For a precise measurement and display of the oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

Display in the instrument cluster

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompa-nied by the word "OIL".

2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading dis-played.


Un

der

the

ho

od

216

Possible displays

1 Oil level OK

2 Oil level is being checked.This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

3 Oil level down to minimum:Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 217.

4 Oil level is too high.

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

5 The oil level sensor is defective.Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 219. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDriveiDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.






6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con-troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is dis-played.

Possible messages> "Engine oil level O.K."

> "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement..."The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand-still on a level surface and the engine is run-ning, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil."Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter , refer also to Adding engine oil below.


Mo

bil

ity

217

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

> "Engine oil level too high"

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

> "Please observe recalculated service inter-val for engine oil"Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 76. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add the maximum amount of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding mes-sage is shown on the Control Display.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant

warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<

Oil changeHave oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Specified engine oilsThe quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with the API SH specification or higher.

Your BMW center will be glad to answer any questions regarding BMW High Per-

formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity ratingsViscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.

Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends on the regional climatic conditions in which you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and 5W-30 classes.<

These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.

CoolantDo not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit-able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives

are hazardous to your health.<

Comply with the appropriate environ-mental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.<


Un

der

the

ho

od

218

Checking coolant level1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-

ture.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-nated as soon as possible.


Mo

bil

ity

219

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-nificant benefit.

CBS Condition Based ServiceSensors and special algorithms take the differ-ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main-tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 76:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads: separately for front and rear

> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

> Brake fluid

> Spark plugs

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote controlYour vehicle continuously stores service-requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-sor can read out this data from the remote con-trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-nance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set cor-rectly, refer to page 80; otherwise the

effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty Infor-mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require-ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro-cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci-fied regular maintenance.<


Mai

nte

nan

ce

220

Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD

Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.

This socket is located on the driver's side to the left, on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover.

Exhaust emission valuesThe warning lamps come on. The exhaust emission values have wors-ened. Have the car checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display these warn-ing lamps.

The lamps flash under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.

Event data recordersYour vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information. In addition, if you have signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-tain vehicle data may be transmitted or recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding services.

CareImportant information on the care and mainte-nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.


Mo

bil

ity

221

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Replacing components

Onboard tool kit

Coupe

The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the cargo bay. Remove the cover.

ConvertibleThe onboard tool kit is stored in a pouch under the cargo bay floor panel.

Wiper blades

1. Fold up the wiper arm.

2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook on the bottom, see arrow.

3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.

4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the windshield, see arrow.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the engine compartment.<

Lamps and bulbsLamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-ing your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch, otherwise you could suffer

burns.<

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-turer.<


Rep

laci

ng

co

mp

on

ents

222

For care and maintenance of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact

your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-respondingly trained personnel.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDLight-emitting diodes installed behind translu-cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.<

Xenon lampsThese bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed

only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if such work is carried out improperly, the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries.<

Access to the lamps1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the upper cover from the head-lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press

the catches towards the rear, see arrows, and pull the cover forward and out.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-tach the cover.

Be careful when installing the cover, oth-erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-

age to the headlamp system.<

Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lampsH8 bulb, 35 watts

1. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the lamps.

2. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and take it out.

3. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.

4. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.

5. Reattach the cover.

Corner-illuminating lamp*H3 bulb, 55 watts

1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.

2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the lamps.


Mo

bil

ity

223

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor towards the right and fold it up.

4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.

5. Insert the bulb.

6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.

7. Reattach the cover.

Tail lamps

Coupe> Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:H21W bulb, 21 watts

> Other lamps:W16W bulb, 16 watts

The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.

1 Turn signal

2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED

3 Backup lamp

4 Brake lamp, consisting of two individual bulbs

5 Brake Force Display lamp


If one of the bulbs 2, 5 or 6 malfunctions, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Convertible> Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:H21W bulb, 21 watts

The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.

1 Turn signal


3 Backup lamp

4 Brake lamp, consisting of two individual bulbs

5 Brake Force Display lamp


If one of the bulbs 2 to 6 malfunctions, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Fender-mounted lamps

Coupe1. Left-hand side: use a screwdriver to pry off

the cover in the cargo bay and remove the cover.

Right-hand side: remove the cover from the right-hand side panel of the cargo bay.


Rep

laci

ng

co

mp

on

ents

224

2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and pull out.

3. Turn signal indicator: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Backup lamps and brake lamps: take out the bulbs and change them.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.

Convertible1. Turn the screws on the corresponding side,

see arrow, by 90° and remove the cover.

2. While applying light pressure, turn the bulb holder of the turn signal bulb to the left, remove it and replace it.

3. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

4. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.

License plate lampC5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the right in the flap of the lamp housing.

2. Take out the lamp towards the left and change the bulb.

3. Insert the lamp.

Center brake lampThis lamp uses LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-respondingly trained personnel.

Changing wheelsYour BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as standard. This removes the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.


Mo

bil

ity

225

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 90.

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 212.

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 212.

The tools for changing wheels are avail-able as optional accessories from your

BMW center.<

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery careThe battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging the batteryOnly charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 228.

DisposalHave old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or hand them in to a recy-

cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<

Power failureAfter a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:

> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 79.

> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 162.

> Navigation system Operability must be waited for, refer to page 130.

> Seat and mirror memoryThe positions must be stored again, refer to page 49.

> Inside rearview mirror with digital compassThe system must be calibrated, refer to page 110.

FusesNever attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth-erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<


Rep

laci

ng

co

mp

on

ents

226

Open the cover in the glove compartment and remove it.

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box.

See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment.


Mo

bil

ity

227

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency call*Conditions for an emergency call:

> Equipment version with full mobile phone preparation package. This equipment makes it possible to initiate an emergency call even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 197.

> Radio readiness is on.

> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.

> The emergency calling system is operable.

Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-vated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, emergency calls are not possible. The BMW Assist system can be reac-tivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

Initiating an Emergency Request call1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the

BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been estab-lished. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

If the current location of your vehicle can be determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.

Under certain conditions, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. This Automatic Collision Noti-fication is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency calling services cannot be guaranteed for

the most unfavorable conditions.<

Roadside AssistanceThe BMW Group's Roadside Assistance ser-vice is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown, including on week-ends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can establish contact with the BMW Group's Road-side Assistance for breakdown assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 193.

First aid pouch*Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,


Giv

ing

an

d re

ceiv

ing

ass

ista

nce

228

check the expiration dates of the contents reg-ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-essary.

Coupe

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo bay in a storage area.

Convertible

The first aid pouch is located in a compartment under the front passenger's seat.

To open: press the button and fold the cover down.To close: fold the cover back up and press it into the catch.

Warning triangle*

Coupe

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it out.

Convertible

The warning triangle is located in a holder in the luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Jump startingIf the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<


Mo

bil

ity

229

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

Preparation1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat-tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-cle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cablesConnect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could

cause injury occur.<

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat-tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 215. The cap is marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-nection up to remove.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-cle providing assistance.

3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting, towing awayObserve the applicable laws and regula-tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-

cles.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<


Giv

ing

an

d re

ceiv

ing

ass

ista

nce

230

Using a tow fittingThe screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

Coupe: it is stored in the onboard tool kit under-neath the cover on the right-hand side of the cargo bay, refer to page 221.

Convertible: it is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath the cargo bay floor, refer to page 221.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Access to screw threadRectangular cover panel in bumper:Press on the upper edges of the cover panel.

Front

Rear

Being towedMake sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 57, otherwise the low-beam

headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and

windshield wipers may be unavailable. If the electrical system fails, do not attempt to tow-start or tow away the car. The electric steering wheel lock cannot be disengaged and the car is not steerable. Jump starting, refer to page 228. Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-ing on local regulations.

Manual transmissionGearshift lever in idle position.

Automatic transmissionSelector lever in position N.Changing selector lever positions, refer to page 59.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph or 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.<

Towing methodsIn come countries, it is illegal to tow your vehicle with a tow bar or tow rope on public highways.

Please familiarize yourself with the relevant towing regulations for the country in which you are driving.

With a tow barThe towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle

could result in damage.<


Mo

bil

ity

231

Re

fere

nce

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

t

With a tow ropeWhen starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<

With a tow truck

Without xDrive

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-

age may result.<

With xDriveDo not tow a BMW with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised, otherwise the

wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.<

Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface only.

Tow-startingAvoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 228. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-started at all.

If the electrical system fails, do not tow or tow-start the vehicle, as it would be

impossible to release the electric steering-wheel lock and the vehicle could not be steered.<

1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent Control HDC when the vehicle is being

tow-started, page 87.<


ReferenceThis chapter contains technical data, short

commands for the voice command system andan index that will help you find information most

quickly.

Reference


Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

234

Technical data

Engine data

Coupe

Convertible

328i/xi 335i

Displacement cu in/cmµ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979

Number of cylinders 6 6

Maximum power output hp 230 300

at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407

at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400-5,000

328i 335i

Displacement cu in/cmµ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979

Number of cylinders 6 6

Maximum power output hp 230 300

at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407

at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400-5,000


Re

fere

nce

235

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions given in inches/mm.

Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38 ft 9 in/11.8 m

335i: height approx. 4 ft 6 in/1,375 mm


Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

236

Convertible

All dimensions given in inches/mm.

Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m.

335i: height approx. 4 ft 6 in/1,375 mm


Re

fere

nce

237

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Weights

Coupe

Convertible

328i 328xi 335i

Curb weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,351/1,520 3,582/1,625 3,571/1,620

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,417/1,550 3,627/1,645 3,582/1,625

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,277/1,940 4,508/2,045 4,497/2,040

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,343/1,970 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045

Load lbs/kg 926/420 926/420 926/420

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,061/935 2,260/1,025 2,172/985

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040 2,326/1,055 2,348/1,065

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 15.5/440 15.5/440 15.2/430

328i 335i

Curb weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,792/1,720 3,946/1,790

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,858/1,750 3,957/1,795

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,674/2,120 4,828/2,190

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,740/2,150 4,839/2,195

Load lbs/kg 882/400 882/400

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,105/955 2,205/1,000

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg - -

Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 7.4-12.4/210-350 7.4-12.4/210-350


Tec

hn

ical

dat

a

238

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 203

including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0

Window washer system For more details: page 63

including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0


Re

fere

nce

239

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Short commands for the voice command system

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or{Assistance window onboard info}

To change the scale in the assistance window 145

{Assistance window scale ... feet} or{Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To open phone 184 {Phone}

To dial phone number 184 {Dial number}

To display phone book 184 {A to Z}

To select from phone book 184 {Call ...} or{Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 184 {Top 8}

Redialing 184 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 184 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 184 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 179 {Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 197 {BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" services 193 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 186 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 186 {BMW Contact numbers}

To open "Roadside Assistance" 193 {Roadside Assistance}


Sh

ort

co

mm

and

s fo

r th

e vo

ice

com

man

d s

yste

m

240

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To open navigation 137 {Navigation}

To display current position 151 {Current position}

To open "Enter address" 131 {Enter address}

To open "New destination" 131 {New destination}

To display "Input map" 136 {Input map}

To open "Information" 137 {Info menu}

To display address book 139 {Address book} or{From address book}

To display destination list 138 {Destination list}

To switch on destination guidance 143 {Start guidance}

To switch off destination guidance 143 {Stop guidance}

To display route criteria 141 {Route preference}

To switch on voice instructions 146 {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 146 {Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions 147 {Repeat navigation info}

To show arrow display 144 {Arrow display}

To display map 145 {Map}, {Map facing north},{Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}

To open route 133, 147 {Route menu}

To open "New route" 147 {New route}

To change scale 145 {Scale ... miles} or{Scale ... feet}

To display towns/cities and streets along the route 146

{Route list}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 73 {Car data}

To display computer 73 {Onboard info}

To display trip computer 74 {Trip computer}

To open speed limit 83 {Limit}

To open stopwatch 83 {Stopwatch}

To activate road-speed limit 83 {Limit on}

To deactivate road-speed limit 83 {Limit off}


Re

fere

nce

241

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 157 {Audio}

To switch on radio 160 {Radio on},{FM} or{AM}

To open "FM" 160 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 160 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 160 {FM all stations}

To select radio station 160 {Station} e.g. {Station WNYC} or{Choose station}

To open "Presets" 160 {FM presets} or{AM presets}

To open "Manual" 161 {FM manual} or{AM manual} or{Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}

To select preset radio station 162 {Preset ...}e.g. {Preset 1}

To open strongest radio station 161 {AM Autostore}

To open "SAT" 165 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 165 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 166 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 165 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 165 {SAT radio categories}

To open CD player 167 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 167 {CD}

To open CD changer 167 {CD changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 167 {CD changer}

To select a CD in the CD changer 167 {CD 1...6}

To select track 168 {CD track ...}

To select a CD and track in the CD changer 168 {CD 1...6 track ...}

To select track 168 {Track ...}

To open DVD 167 {DVD player menu}

To switch on DVD 167 {DVD player}

To select music track on DVD 168 {DVD track ...}

To start sound output for external audio device 174

{Audio Aux on}


Sh

ort

co

mm

and

s fo

r th

e vo

ice

com

man

d s

yste

m

242

Climate

Menu

Function Command

To open "Vent settings" 103 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 104 {Automatic programs}

Function Command

To open the menu {Settings menu}

"Display off" 21 {Display off}

To open "Info sources" {Info sources}

To open "Settings" {Settings}

To open "Door locks" 29, 32 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 53 {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 61 {Lighting}

To open "BMW Service" 193 {BMW Service}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 192 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 192 {Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 81 {Check Control messages}

To open "BMW Services" settings 197 {BMW service settings}

To set brightness of Control Display 84 {Brightness}

To open "Units" 71 {Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 146 {Languages}

To open "Time" 79 {Time}

To open "Date" 80 {Date}

To open "PDC" 85 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 89 {FTM}


Re

fere

nce

243

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

244

Everything from A-Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.

AABS Antilock Brake

System 86ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 65Accident, refer to Initiating an

Emergency Request call 227

Activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 106

"Activation time" 106Active cruise control 65– indicator lamps 68– malfunction 69– selecting distance 67– sensor 68Active steering 93– warning lamp 93Adaptive Head Light 99"Add digits" for mobile

phone 185Additives– coolant 217"Address book" in

navigation 139Address for navigation– deleting 140– entering 131, 135, 139– selecting 140– storing 139– storing current position 139"Add to destination

list" 134, 136

Adjusting temperature inside the car, refer to Automatic climate control 103

Adjusting the thigh support 45Adjusting the tone during

audio operation, refer to Tone control 157

Airbags 94– indicator/warning lamp 95– sitting safely 44Air conditioning mode– automatic climate

control 103– ventilation 105Air distribution– automatic 104– individual 103Air flow rate 104Airing, refer to Ventilation 105Air pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 204Air recirculation, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 104"Air recirculation on / off" 53Air supply– automatic climate

control 103– ventilation 105Air vents 102AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 203Alarm system 34– avoiding unintentional

alarms 35– interior motion sensor 35– switching off an alarm 35– tilt alarm sensor 35"All channels" for satellite

radio 165All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 213"All stations", displaying with

the radio 160

All-wheel drive, refer to xDrive 87

"AM", waveband 156, 160Ambient air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 104Antenna for mobile phone 178Antifreeze– coolant 217– washer fluid 63Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 34Anti-theft system 29Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 237Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 237Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 111Arrival time, refer to

Computer 73Arrival time, refer to Starting

destination guidance 143Arrow display for

navigation 144"Arrow display" in

navigation 144Ashtray– front 113– rear 114Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control systems 86

Assistance window 20– refer to iDrive 20AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 104"Audio" 159Audio 156– controls 156– switching on/off 156– tone control 157– volume 157


Re

fere

nce

245

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

"Audio", refer to Tone control 157

Audio device, external 112"Auto. headlamps" 98Automatic– air distribution 104– air flow rate 104– cruise control 63, 65– headlamp control 97– service notification 194– storing of stations 161Automatic climate control 102– automatic air

distribution 104– settings via iDrive 103Automatic curb monitor 52"Automatic programs" with

automatic climate control 104

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 104

Automatic station search 161Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59– interlock 59– overriding selector lever

lock 61– shiftlock, refer to Changing

selector lever position 60– sport program 60– towing 229– tow-starting 229"Automatic ventilation" 106AUTO program for automatic

climate control 104"Autostore"– on the radio 162"AUX" 156, 174"AUX" for external audio

device 174AUX-IN– port 112AUX-In, refer to External audio

device 174Average fuel consumption 73– setting the units 75Average speed 73"Avoid ferries" in

navigation 142

"Avoid highways" in navigation 142

Avoid highways in navigation 141

Avoiding unintentional alarms 35

"Avoid tollroads" in navigation 142

Axle loads, refer to Weights 237

"A - Z" 184, 185

BBackrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 46Backrests, refer to Seat

adjustment 45Backrest width adjustment 46Back seats– refer to Rear seats 47Backup lamps– replacing bulb 223Backup lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 223Balance, tone control 157Band-aids, refer to First-aid

pouch 227Bar, refer to Towing

methods 230Base plate for telephone or

mobile phone– refer to Snap-in adapter in

the center armrest storage compartment 111

Bass, tone control 157Bass sounds, refer to Treble

and bass 157Battery 225– charging 225– disposal 37, 225– jump starting 228– remote control 28– temporary power failure 225Battery renewal– remote control 37– remote control for vehicle 37Being towed 230Belt hand-over 51

Belts, refer to Safety belts 50Belt tensioner, refer to Safety

belts 50Beverage holders, refer to

Cup holders 112Blinds, refer to Roller sun

blinds 111Blower, refer to Air flow

rate 104Bluetooth, refer to separate

Owner's Manual"BMW Assist" 193, 194, 195BMW Assist– activating 197– Concierge service 195– contacting BMW Customer

Relations 195– Roadside Assistance 193– services offered 192– TeleService 194"BMW Contact" 186"BMW Contact

Numbers" 186BMW Homepage 4BMW Maintenance

System 219"BMW

Services" 196, 197, 198BMW webpage 4Bottle holders, refer to Cup

holders 112Brake assist, refer to Dynamic

Brake Control DBC 86Brake fluid, refer to Service

requirements 76Brake Force Display 93Brake lamps– replacing bulb 223– two-stage 93Brake pads 122– breaking in 122Brake rotors 123– brakes 122– breaking in 122


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

246

Brakes– ABS 86– BMW Maintenance

System 219– breaking in 122– parking brake 58– service requirements 76Brakes, refer to Braking

safely 123Brake system 122– BMW Maintenance

System 219– breaking in 122– disc brakes 123Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 227Breaking in the clutch 122Breaking in the differential,

refer to Engine and differential 122

Break-in period 122Brightness of the Control

Display 84"Brightness"on the control

display 84Bulb changing, refer to Lamps

and bulbs 221Button for starting the engine,

refer to Start/stop button 57Buttons on the steering

wheel 11

CCalifornia Proposition 65

warning 6"Call" 185, 196Call– accepting 183– displaying accepted 185– ending 184– missed 185– starting 184Calling– from phone book 184– from Top 8 list 185– redialing 185Can holders, refer to Cup

holders 112

Capacities 238Capacity of the cargo bay 237Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 225Car care, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochureCar-care products, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

"Car Data" 73Care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochureCargo, securing 125Cargo bay– capacity 237– convenient access 36– folding up the floor

panel 116– lamp, refer to Interior

lamps 100– opening from inside 33– opening from outside 33Cargo loading– securing cargo 125– stowing cargo 124– vehicle 124Caring for artificial leather,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for plastic, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Car jack– jacking points 225Car key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 28

Car phone 178– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111– refer to Mobile phone 178– refer to separate Owner's

ManualCar radio, refer to Radio 160Car wash 124– also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure– with convenient access 37Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 122"Categories" for satellite

radio 165CBS Condition Based

Service 219"CD" 156, 167CD changer 167– compressed audio files 167– controls 156– fast forward/reverse 171– installation location 171– playing a track 169– random order 170– repeating a track 170– selecting a CD 167– selecting a track 168– switching on/off 156– tone control 157– volume 157CD player 167– compressed audio files 167– controls 156– fast forward/reverse 171– playing a track 169– random order 170– repeating a track 170– selecting a track 168– switching on/off 156– tone control 157– volume 157Cell phones, use inside the

car, refer to Mobile phones in the vehicle 122

Center armrest 111Center brake lamp– replacing bulb 224


Re

fere

nce

247

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Center console, refer to Around the center console 14

"Central locking" 30Central locking– from inside 32– from outside 29Central locking system 29– convenient access 35– hotel function 34Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5Changing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 221Changing the language on the

Control Display 84Changing the measurement

units on the Control Display 75

Changing wheels 224Chassis number, refer to

Engine compartment 215Check Control 81"Check Control

messages" 83Child-restraint fixing system

LATCH 56Child-restraint systems 55Child seats, refer to

Transporting children safely 55

Chrome parts, care, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cigarette lighter, refer to Lighter 113

Cleaning, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cleaning headlamps 62– washer fluid 63"Climate" 103Clock 71– 12h/24h mode 80– setting time 79Closing– from inside 32– from outside 29Clothes hooks 112Cockpit 10

Cold start, refer to Starting the engine 58

Combined instrument, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Comfort access, refer to Convenient access 35

Comfort area, refer to Around the center console 14

"Communication" 183, 193,194, 195

Compact disc, refer to– CD changer 167– CD player 167Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 57

Compass 109Computer 72– displays on Control

Display 73– hour signal 80Computer, refer to iDrive 16"Concert hall" for Tone

control 158"Concierge" 195Concierge service 195Condensation, refer to When

the vehicle is parked 124Condition Based Service

CBS 219Configuring settings, refer to

Personal Profile 28Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking the vehicle 31

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 114

Consumption, refer to Average consumption 73

Consumption display– average consumption 73"Continue guidance to

destination?" 144Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16

Control Display– brightness 84– changing the language 84– switching off/on 21Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16Controller, refer to iDrive 16Controls and displays 10Control unit, refer to iDrive 16Convenient access 35– replacing the battery 37– what to observe before

entering a car wash 37Convenient operation– convertible top 30– glass sunroof 30– glass sunroof with

convenient access 36– windows 30– windows with convenient

access 36Convertible– bag holder 115– enlarging cargo bay 115– folding down rear

backrest 115– retractable hardtop 40– rollover protection

system 95– securing cargo 125– stowing cargo 124Convertible top– convenient operation 30– remote control 30Coolant 217– checking level 218Coolant temperature 72Cooling, maximum 104Cooling fluid, refer to

Coolant 217Cooling system, refer to

Coolant 217Corner-illuminating lamps,

refer to Adaptive Head Light 99

Cornering lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 99

Correct tires 212


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

248

Courtesy lamps, refer to Interior lamps 100

Cross-hairs in navigation 136Cruise control 63– active 65– malfunction 65Cruising range 72Cup holders 112Curb weight, refer to

Weights 237"Current position" 151Current position– displaying 151– entering 139– storing 139"Customer

Relations" 187, 195

DDashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10Dashboard, refer to

Instrument cluster 12Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 100Data, technical 234– dimensions 235– engine 234– weights 237"Date" 81Date– setting 80– setting format 81"Date format" 81"Daytime running lamps" 99Daytime running lamps 98DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 86DCC, refer to Cruise

control 63"Deactivated" 50Deactivating front passenger

airbags 94Deadlocking, refer to

Locking 30Decommissioning the vehicle– refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure

Defect– door lock 32– fuel filler door 202– glass sunroof 40Defogging windows 105Defrost, windows 105Defrosting windows and

removing condensation– automatic climate

control 105Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 105Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 105"Delete address book" in

navigation 141"Delete all numbers" on the

mobile phone 186"Delete data" in

navigation 141"Delete" for mobile

phone 186Destination address– deleting 140– entering 131, 135Destination for navigation– destination list 138– entry 131– home address 141– manual entry 131, 135– selecting from address

book 140– selecting using

information 137– selecting via language 135– selecting via map 136– storing 139Destination guidance 143– canceling voice

instructions 54– changing specified

route 141– displaying route 144– distance and arrival 143– starting 143– terminating/continuing 143– voice instructions 146– volume of voice

instructions 147

Destination list for navigation system 138

Destinations recently driven to 138

Detour, refer to Driving around a traffic congestion 150

Detour during navigation 150"Detour" in navigation 150"Dial" for mobile phone 184"Dial number" 184Digital clock 71Digital compass 109Dimensions 235Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 61Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 146Directory for navigation, refer

to Address book 139Displacement, refer to Engine

data 234Display, refer to iDrive

controls 16Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 100"Display off" 21Displays– on the Control Display 16Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 12Displays and controls 10Disposal– coolant 217– remote control battery 37– vehicle battery 225Distance control, refer to

Active cruise control 65Distance remaining to service,

refer to Service requirements 76

"Distance to dest." 74Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 85

Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 28

Door lock 31"Door locks" 29, 31, 32, 77


Re

fere

nce

249

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Doors, emergency operation 32

DOT Quality Grades 210Draft-free ventilation 105Drinks holders, refer to Cup

holders 112Drive-off assistance, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 86

Drive-off assistant 88Driving around a traffic

congestion 150Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 97Driving notes 122Driving off on hills, refer to

Drive-off assistant 88Driving route, refer to

Displaying route 144Driving stability control

systems 86Driving through water 123Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 122Dry air, refer to Cooling

function 105DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 87– indicator/warning lamp 87DVD for navigation 130Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 86"Dynamic route" in

navigation 142Dynamic Stability Control

DSC– indicator/warning lamp 87Dynamic Traction Control

DTC– indicator/warning lamp 87

EEBV Electronic brake-force

distribution 86Eject button, refer to Buttons

on the CD player 156

Electric– seat adjustment 45Electrical malfunction– door lock 32– driver's door 32– fuel filler door 202– glass sunroof 40– luggage compartment lid 33Electric seat adjustment 45Electric steering wheel

lock 57– with convenient access 36Electronic brake-force

distribution EBV 86Electronic oil level check 215Emergency actuation,

automatic transmission, refer to Overriding selector lever lock 61

Emergency call 227Emergency operation– fuel filler door, manual

release 202Emergency operation, refer to

Closing manually– glass sunroof 40Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation– door lock 32Emergency release– luggage compartment lid

from inside 34Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 227Emissions test, refer to

Service requirements 76"Enable services" 198"End call" 184Engine– breaking in 122– data 234– overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 72– speed 234– starting 58– starting, convenient

access 35– switching off 58Engine compartment 215

Engine coolant, refer to Coolant 217

Engine oil– adding 217– BMW Maintenance

System 219– capacity 238– checking level 215– intervals between changes,

refer to Service requirements 76

"Engine oil level" 216Engine output, refer to Engine

data 234Engine speed, refer to Engine

data 234Engine starting, refer to

Starting the engine 58"Enter address" 132Entering a destination

country 132Entering a house number or

intersection 134Entering a street 133Entering destination 132Entering the intersection 133"Entertainment" 156Entry lamps, refer to Interior

lamps 100"Equalizer", refer to Tone

control 158Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 158Error messages, refer to

Check Control 81"ESN" 164ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 86

Event data recorders 220Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 122Exterior mirrors 51– adjusting 51– automatic dimming

feature 52– automatic heating 51– folding in and out 51


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

250

External audio device 112, 174

Eyes– for tow-starting and towing

away 230– for tying down loads 125

FFader, tone control 157Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 81Failure of an electrical

consumer 225False alarm– avoiding unintentional

alarm 35– switching off an alarm 35Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 50Fastest route for

navigation 141Fast forward– CD changer 171– CD player 171"Fast route" in navigation 142Filter– refer to Microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 106

Fine wood, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

First aid pouch 227Fixture for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 57Flashlight, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 111Flash when locking/

unlocking 31Flat tire– Run-Flat Tires 212– Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 90

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 89– indicating a flat tire 90– indicator/warning lamp 90– initializing the system 89– malfunction 90– snow chains 89, 213– system limits 89Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 211Floor mats, carpets, refer to


Fluid reservoir, refer to Washer fluid reservoir 63

"FM", waveband 156, 160FM, waveband 160Fog lamps 100– indicator lamp 13, 100Folding in the mirrors, before

driving into a car wash 51Folding up the floor panel 116Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 123Footwell lamps, refer to

Interior lamps 100For your own safety 5Four-wheel drive, refer to

xDrive 87Frequency, selecting

manually 161Front airbags 94FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 89Fuel 203– average consumption 73– gauge 72– high-quality brands 203– quality 203– specifications 203– tank contents, refer to

Capacities 238Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 72Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 72Fuel filler door 202– releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 202Fuses 225

GGarage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 108

Gasoline– refer to Average

consumption 73Gasoline, refer to Required

fuel 203Gasoline display, refer to Fuel

gauge 72Gasoline engine, checking oil

level 215Gear indicator, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 59

Gearshift lever– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59– manual transmission 59Gearshifts– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59– manual transmission 59General driving notes 122Glass sunroof, electric 39– closing after electrical

malfunction 40– convenient operation 30, 32– initializing 39– opening, closing 39– operation with convenient

access 36– pinch protection system 39– power failure 39– raising 39– remote control 30Glove compartment 111– rechargeable flashlight 111GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 130Grills 102Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 237


Re

fere

nce

251

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

HHandbrake, refer to Parking

brake 58Hand lamp, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 111Hands-free system 14Hazard warning flashers 14HDC Hill Descent Control 87Head airbags 94Headlamp control,

automatic 97Headlamp flasher 61– indicator lamp 11, 13Headlamps– care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochureHead restraints 46– front, removing 47– rear, removing 47– sitting safely 44Heated– mirrors 51– rear window 105– seats 48Heating– mirrors 51– rear window 105– residual heat 105– seats 48Heating and ventilation, refer

to Climate 102Heating while at a standstill,

refer to Using residual heat 105

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 124

Height, refer to Dimensions 235

Height adjustment– seats 45– steering wheel 52High beams 99– headlamp flasher 99– indicator lamp 13High water, refer to Driving

through water 123Highways, refer to Route

criteria 141

Hill Descent Control HDC 87Hills 123Holders for cups 112Home address 141"Home address" in

navigation 141Homepage BMW 4Hood 214Hooks for shopping bags 116Horn 10, 11Hotel function 34Hot exhaust system 122"Hour memo" 80"House number" in

destination entry 134Hydraulic brake assist, refer to

Dynamic Brake Control DBC 86

Hydroplaning 123

IIce warning, refer to Outside

temperaturewarning 71

ID3 tag, refer to Information about the track 169

Identification marks– Run-Flat Tires 212– tire coding 210

iDrive 16– adjusting brightness 84– assistance window 20– automatic climate

control 103– changing language 84– changing units of measure

and display format 75– confirming selection or

entry 19– controls 16– displays, menus 17– menu guidance 17– operating principle 16– overview 16– selecting a menu item 19– setting the date and time 79– start menu 17– status information 20– switching menu pages 19– symbols 18iDrive operating principle 16Ignition 57– switched off 57– switched on 57Ignition key, refer to Remote

control with integrated key 28

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 57

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 57

Ignition lock 57i menu 18Indicator and warning

lamps 13– Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 92Individual air distribution 103Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 204Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 90

Information– on another location 137– on country 137– on current position 137– on destination location 137


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

252

Information menu, refer to i menu 18

"Information on destination" 139

"Info sources" 77Initializing– active steering 93– after power failure 225– compass, refer to

Calibrating 110– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 89– glass sunroof 39"Input map" 136Installation location– CD changer 171– navigation DVD drive 130– telephone 111Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 146

Instrument cluster 12Instrument lighting 100Instrument panel, refer to

Cockpit 10Integrated key 28Integrated universal remote

control 108Interesting destination for

navigation 137"Interim time" 84Interior lamps 100– remote control 30Interior motion sensor 35Interior rearview mirror 52– automatic dimming

feature 52– compass 109Interlock, refer to Disengaging

the remote control 59Intermittent mode of the

wipers 62

JJacking points 225Joystick, refer to iDrive 16Jumpering, refer to Jump

starting 228Jump starting 228

KKey, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 28Keyless go, refer to

Convenient access 35Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Convenient access 35

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 28

Kick-down 60– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 60Knock control 203

LLamps– automatic headlamp

control 97– parking lamps/low beams 97Lamps and bulbs, replacing

bulbs 221"Language / Units" 75"Language / Units" in

navigation 146"Languages" in

navigation 146"Languages"on the control

display 84Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 50Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 125Last destinations, refer to

Destination list 138"Last seat pos." 50LATCH child-restraint fixing

system 56LED Light-emitting

diodes 222Length, refer to

Dimensions 235License plate lamp, replacing

bulb 224Light-emitting diodes

LED 222

Lighter 113– connecting electrical

appliances 114"Lighting" 61, 98Lighting– instruments 100– lamps and bulbs 221– vehicle, refer to Lamps 97Light-metal alloy wheels, care,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Light switch 97"Limit" 83Limit, refer to Speed limit 83Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 125Lock buttons, doors, refer to

Locking 32Locking– adjusting confirmation

signal 31– from inside 32– from outside 30– without remote control, refer

to Convenient access 35Locking and unlocking doors– confirmation signals 31– from inside 32– from outside 29Low-beam headlamps 97– automatic 97Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 46Luggage compartment lid 33– convenient access 36– emergency operation, refer

to Opening manually 33– emergency release 34– locking or unlocking

separately 34– opening from inside 33– opening from outside 33– opening manually 33– remote control 30Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 126Lumbar support 46


Re

fere

nce

253

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

MM+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 213Maintenance, refer to Service

BookletMaintenance system 219Malfunction– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 61– luggage compartment lid 33– tires 90Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 81Manual mode, automatic


"Manual" on the radio 161Manual operation– door lock 32– driver's door 32– fuel filler door 202– glass sunroof 40– luggage compartment lid 33– transmission lock, automatic

transmission 61Manual transmission 59Map– changing scale 145– destination entry 136"Map direction of travel" 145"Map facing north" 145Master key, refer to Remote

control with integrated key 28

Maximum cooling 104Maximum speed– with winter tires 213Measurements, refer to

Dimensions 235Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 49Memory keys,

programmable 21MENU button 16Menus– Control Display 17Menus, refer to iDrive 16

Message list, traffic information 148

Microfilter– BMW Maintenance

System 219– for automatic climate

control 106Microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter– BMW Maintenance

System 219Microphone– telephone 14– voice input 14Mirror dimming feature 52Mirrors 51– automatic curb monitor 52– exterior mirrors 51– heating 51– interior rearview mirror 52– memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 49"Missed calls" 185Missed calls 185Mobile phone– accepted calls 185– adjusting volume 182– calling 184– ending call 184– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111– missed calls 185– operation via iDrive 183– redialing 185– refer to separate Owner's

Manual– Top 8 185– touch tone dialing 187Mobile phone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 111

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Mobile phones in the vehicle 122

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive controls 16

Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

"Monitor on / off" 53Most recent mobile phone

numbers 185MP3, refer to Compressed

audio files 167Multifunctional steering

wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch– refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 61– refer to Wiper system 62Multimedia screen, refer to

iDrive 16Music tracks, refer to

Tracks 168"Mute on / off" 53

N"Navigation" 131Navigation announcements,

refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 146

Navigation drive, location 130Navigation DVD 130


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

254

Navigation system 130– address book 139– changing a route 147– destination entry 131– destination guidance in

assistance window 130– destination list 138– displaying current

position 151– entering a destination

manually 131, 135– last destinations 138– navigation DVD 130– opening 131– route display 144– route list 146– searching for a special

destination 137– selecting destination using

information 137– selecting destination via

map 136– selecting route criteria 141– starting destination

guidance 143– switching off, refer to

Terminating/continuing destination guidance 143

– terminating/continuing destination guidance 143

– voice instructions 146– volume adjustment 147"Navigation voice

instructions" via buttons on the steering wheel 53

Neck support, refer to Head restraints 46

Nets, refer to Storage compartments 112

"New address" in navigation 139

"New data request" for BMW Assist 195

"New destination" 131, 136"New route" 147New tires 212"Next entertainment

source" 53North-facing map 145

Nozzles 102Number of cylinders, refer to

Engine data 234Nylon rope, refer to Tow

rope 231

OOBD socket, refer to Socket

for On-Board Diagnosis 220Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 203Odometer 71Oil, refer to Engine oil 215Oil consumption 215Oil level 215Old batteries, refer to

Disposal 225"On a new destination" in

navigation 138"Onboard info" 73Onboard tool kit 221"On destination" 138"On location" 138Opening and closing– convenient access 35– from inside 32– from outside 29– using the door lock 31– via the remote control 29Operation by voice for mobile

phone 187– adjusting volume 189– canceling 188– correcting phone

number 189– dialing phone number 189– placing a call 189– redialing 190– voice commands 188– voice phone book 189"Options" 196Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17Outlets– refer to Ventilation 105Output, refer to Engine

data 234

Outside-air mode– automatic climate

control 104Outside-temperature

display 71– changing units of

measure 75– in computer 75Outside temperature

warning 71Overheated engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 72Overriding selector lever

lock 61

PPark assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control 85"Parked car operation" 106"Parked car ventilation" 106Parked car ventilation 106– activating switch-on

times 107– preselecting switch-on

times 106– switching on and off

directly 106Parking– vehicle 58Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 85Parking brake 58– indicator lamp 59Parking lamps 97Parking lamps/low beams 97Passenger-side mirror tilt

function 52"Pathway lighting" 98Pathway lighting 98"PDC" 85PDC Park Distance Control 85Personal Profile 28"Perspective" 145Phone book 183


Re

fere

nce

255

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Phone numbers– deleting from phone

book 186– dialing 184– most recent numbers 185– selecting in phone book 185– Top 8 185Pinch protection system– glass sunroof, electric 39– windows 38Placing a call, refer to

telephone owner's manual"Play" for audio mode 168"Play" for satellite radio 165Pollen– refer to Microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 106

Position– displaying 151– saving, refer to Storing

current position 139Power failure 225Power seats 45Power windows 38Power windows, refer to

Windows 37Preselecting switch-on times

for parked car ventilation 106

"Presets", displaying with the radio 160

"Presets" for satellite radio 165

Pressure, tires 204Pressure monitoring, tires 89– Flat Tire Monitor 89Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 90

"Profile" 198Programmable buttons on the

steering wheel 11Programmable memory

keys 21Protection function, refer to

Pinch protection system– glass sunroof, electric 39– windows 38

Providing medical assistance, refer to First add pouch 227

Puncture– Flat Tire Monitor 89

RRadio– autostore 161– controls 156– listening to stations 160– sampling stations 161– satellite radio 164– selecting a

waveband 156, 160– selecting the frequency

manually 161– station search 161– stations with best

reception 161– storing stations 162– switching on/off 156– tone control 157– volume 157Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 57Radio readiness 57– switched off 57– switched on 57Radio-remote key, refer to

Remote control with integrated key 28

Rain sensor 62"Random", refer to Random

play 171"Random all" for audio

mode 171"Random directory" for audio

mode 171Random play 170"RDS" Radio Data

System 163Reading lamps 101Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 223– replacing bulb 223Rear seats– adjusting head restraints 47– folding down backrests 114

Rear turn signals– replacing bulb 223Rear ventilation 106Rearview mirror, refer to

Mirrors 51Rear window defroster 105Rear window roller blind, refer

to Roller sun blinds 111"Received calls" 185Receiving level of mobile

phone, refer to Status information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 111Recirculated-air mode 104Recirculation of air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 104Reclining seat, refer to

Backrest 45Recording times, refer to

Stopwatch 83"Redial" for mobile phone 185Refueling 202Releasing– hood 214Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 72Remote control 28– battery renewal 37– convenient access 35– garage door opener 108– luggage compartment lid 30– malfunction 31, 37– removing from the ignition

lock 57– service data 219"Repeat directory" for audio

mode 170"Repeat" for audio mode 170"Repeat track" for audio

mode 170Replacement remote

control 28Replacing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 221Replacing tires 212Replacing tires, refer to New

wheels and tires 212Reporting safety defects 6


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

256

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel gauge 72

"Reset" 89, 91Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 159"Reset" for stopwatch 84"Reset" for tone settings 159Residual heat 105Restraint systems– for children 55– refer to Safety belts 50Retractable hardtop 40– care, refer to


– opening and closing 41Reverse– CD changer 171– CD player 171Reverse gear– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 60– manual transmission 59Road map 145"Roadside Assistance" 193Roadside

Assistance 193, 227Roadside parking lamps 99Roadworthiness test, refer to

Service requirements 76Roller sun blinds 111Rollover protection system,

convertible 95– resetting 96Roof load capacity 237Roof-mounted luggage

rack 126Rope, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 231Rotary/pushbutton, refer to

iDrive 16

Route 141– arrow display 144– changing 147– display 144– displaying streets and

towns/cities 146– displaying town 146– list 146– map display 145– selecting 141– selecting criteria 141RSC Runflat System

Component, refer to Run-Flat Tires 212

Rubber parts, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 212

Run-Flat Tires 212– continuing driving with a

damaged tire 90– flat tire 90– Flat Tire Monitor 90– new tires 212– replacing 212– tire inflation pressure 204– winter tires 213

SSafety-belt height

adjustment 50Safety belts 50– belt hand-over 51– damage 50– indicator/warning lamp 50– reminder 50– sitting safely 44Safety belts, care, refer to


Safety systems– airbags 94– Antilock Brake System

ABS 86– brake system 86– driving stability control

systems 86– Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 86– rollover protection system,

convertible 95– safety belts 50Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat

Tires 212"SAT" 156, 164Satellite radio 164– displaying additional

information 165– enabling 164– selecting channel 165– storing channel 165"Scan"– sampling radio stations 161– sampling tracks on CD 169Scan– CD changer 169– CD player 169– radio 161"Scan all" for audio mode 170"Scan directory" for audio

mode 170Screen, refer to iDrive

controls 16Screw thread for tow

fitting 230SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 164Seat adjustment– electric 45– mechanical 45Seat and mirror memory 49Seat belt reminder, refer to

'Fasten safety belts' reminder 50

Seat heating 48


Re

fere

nce

257

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Seats 44– adjusting electrically 45– adjusting the seats 45– heating 48– memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 49– saving a setting, refer to Seat

and mirror memory 49– sitting safely 44Securing cargo 117, 118Securing the vehicle– from inside 32– from outside 29"Select as

destination" 138, 196"Select current speed" 83Selecting a country for

navigation 132Selecting an audio source 156Selecting distance for active

cruise control 67Selecting menu items 19Selecting new scale for

navigation 145Selector lever– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59Selector lever lock, refer to

Changing selector lever positions, shiftlock 59

Selector lever positions– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59"Service" 77, 194, 216Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 227Service car, refer to Roadside

Assistance 227Service data in the remote

control 219Service Interval Display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 219

"Service notification" 194"Service Request" 187, 194Service requirement display,

refer to Condition Based Service CBS 219

"Service requirements" 77, 194, 216

Service requirements 76"Service Status" 197"Set date" 81"Set time" 80"Settings" 196, 197, 198Settings– changing settings on the

Control Display 84– clock, 12h/24h mode 80– date format 81– language 84Settings and information 75"Settings" for unlocking 29Settings menu, refer to

i menu 17Setting times, refer to

Preselecting switch-on times 106

Shifting gears– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 60– manual transmission 59Shiftlock– automatic transmission,

refer to Changing selector lever positions 60

Short commands for the voice command system 239

Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 141

"Short route" in navigation 142

"Show current position" 137"Show destination

position" 137Shuffled, refer to Random– CD changer 170– CD player 170Side airbags 94Side windows, refer to

Windows 37Signal horn, refer to

Horn 10, 11Sitting safely 44– with airbags 44– with head restraint 44– with safety belts 44

Ski bag 116Ski bag for convertible, refer to

Through-loading opening with integrated transport bag 117

Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass sunroof, electric 39

Slot for remote control 57Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 113Snap-in adapter, refer to

Center armrest storage compartment 111

Socket, On-Board Diagnosis OBD 220

Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 114

Song search, refer to Playing a track 169

SOS, refer to Initiating an Emergency Request call 227

Sound output for entertainment on/off 156

Spare fuses 225Spare fuses, refer to

Fuses 225Spark plugs, refer to Service

requirements 76Speaking, refer to Voice

instructions from navigation system 146

Speed– Run-Flat Tires 90– with winter tires 213Speed-dependent volume

control 157Speed limit 83Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 83Speedometer 12"Speed volume", refer to Tone

control 158Spray nozzles, refer to

Cleaning windshield and headlamps 62

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 86


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

258

Start/stop button 57– starting the engine 58– switching off the engine 58"Start guidance" 134, 143Starting, refer to Starting the

engine 58Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 228Starting difficulties– jump starting 228– temperature 58Starting the engine– start/stop button 57Start menu 17"Start service" 193"State / Province" in

destination entry 132Station– refer to Radio 160"Status" 77Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5Steering wheel 52– adjustment 52– arrested, refer to Electric

steering wheel lock 53– buttons on steering

wheel 11– lock 57– lock, refer to Electric

steering wheel lock 53– locking with convenient

access 36"Steering wheel buttons" 53Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 93Steptronic, refer to Automatic


"Stopwatch" 84Stopwatch 83Storage compartments 112Storage nets 116"Store" for satellite radio 166"Store in address book" in

navigation 139"Store" on the radio 162Storing current position 139Storing radio stations 162

Storing seat positions, refer to Seat and mirror memory 49

Storing tires 213Stowage, refer to Storage

compartments 112"Street" in destination

entry 134Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 204Surface ice, refer to Outside

temperature warning 71"Surround Settings", refer to

Tone control 158Switches, refer to Cockpit 10Switching off– engine 58Switching off the engine– start/stop button 57Switching on– audio 156– CD changer 156– CD player 156– radio 156Switching on the hour

signal 80Switching the cooling function

on and off 105Symbols 4– navigation system 150– status information 20– traffic info for navigation

system 147

TTachometer 71Tail lamps 223– replacing bulb 223Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 238Technical data 234– capacities 238– dimensions 235Technical modifications, refer

to For your own safety 5Telematics, refer to

TeleService, BMW Assist 192

Telephone– installation location, refer to

Center armrest 111– refer to separate Owner's

ManualTelephone, refer to Mobile

phone 178"Telephone list" 53TeleService 194Temperature– automatic climate

control 103– changing unit of measure 75– coolant, refer to Coolant

temperature 72Temperature display– outside temperature 71– outside temperature

warning 71– setting the units 75Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 63Tensioning straps, refer to

Securing cargo 125"Terminate services" 197"Text language" 84"Theater" for Tone

control 158The individual vehicle 5Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 224Through-loading opening with

integrated transport bag 117

Through-loading system 114Tilt alarm sensor 35Tilt function, passenger-side

mirror 52"Time" 80"Time / Date" 79, 80, 81"Time format" 80Timer, refer to Preselecting

switch-on times 106"Timer 1" for parked car

ventilation 107"Timer 2" for parked car

ventilation 107Tire inflation pressure 204– loss 90, 91


Re

fere

nce

259

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 90

– resetting the system 91– system limitations 90– warning lamp 92Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 90Tire Quality Grading 210Tires– age 210, 212– air loss 92– breaking in 122– changing, refer to Changing

wheels 224– condition 211– damage 211– inflation pressure 204– labels 210– minimum tread depth 211– new wheels and tires 212– pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 89– pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 90

– puncture 90– replacing 212– Run-Flat 212– size 210– storage 213– tread depth 211– wear indicators, refer to

Minimum tread depth 211– wheel/tire combination, refer

to Correct wheels and tires 212

– winter tires 213TMC station, refer to Traffic

information 147"Tone" 157Tone in audio mode– adjusting 157– middle setting 159Tools, refer to Onboard tool

kit 221Top, refer to Retractable

hardtop 40

"Top 8" for mobile phone 184Torque, refer to Engine

data 234Touch tone dialing 187Tow bar 230Tow fitting 230– screw thread 230Tow fittings for tow-starting

and towing away 230Towing 229– car with automatic

transmission 229– methods 230Towing and tow-starting 229Town/city for destination 132"Town / City" in destination

entry 132Tow rope 231Tow-starting 229, 231"TPM" 91TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 90Tracks– random play sequence 170– sampling, Scan 169– searching for 169Track width, refer to

Dimensions 235Traction control, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability Control 86

"Traffic Info" 148Traffic information for

navigation– calling up 148– display on route map 149– during destination

guidance 150– switching on/off 147– symbols 150Traffic jam– displaying traffic

information 147– driving around 150

Transmission– automatic transmission with

Steptronic 59– manual transmission 59– overriding selector lever lock

for automatic transmission with Steptronic 61

Transmission interlock– refer to Changing selector

lever position 59– refer to P Park 60Transporting children

safely 55Transport securing devices,

refer to Securing cargo 125Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tire tread 211Treble, refer to Treble and

bass 157Treble, tone control 157"Trip computer" 74Trip computer 74Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 71"Triple turn signal" 62Triple turn signal activation 61Trip odometer 71Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 33Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 235Turn signal indicators 61– indicator/warning lamp 12– triple turn signal 61Tying down loads, refer to

Cargo loading 125

UUnderbody protection, refer to


Uniform Tire Quality Grading/UTQR 210

"Units" 75Units– average consumption 75– temperature 75


Eve

ryth

ing

fro

m A

-Z

260

Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 108

Universal mobile phone preparation package, refer to separate Owner's Manual

Universal remote control 108Unlatching, refer to

Unlocking 35"Unlock button" 30Unlocking– from inside 32– from outside 29– luggage compartment lid 36– without remote control, refer

to Convenient access 35"Update services" 196

VVehicle– battery 225– breaking in 122– care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure– cargo loading 124– Identification Number, refer

to Engine compartment 215– measurements, refer to

Dimensions 235– parking 58– washing, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure– weight 237"Vehicle / Tires" for

unlocking 29Vehicle jack 225Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current position 151

Ventilation 105– draft-free 105– in the rear 106Ventilation, refer to

Climate 102Ventilation while at a

standstill 106Vents, refer to Ventilation 105"Vent settings" 103

Voice commands– overview 23– short commands 239Voice instructions from

navigation system 146– muting 54, 147– repeating 54, 147– switching on/off 146– volume 147Voice phone book 189Volume 156– audio sources 156– fuel tank, refer to

Capacities 238– mobile phone 182– speed-dependent

control 157– voice instructions 147Volume distribution– front/rear 157– left/right 157

WWarning and indicator

lamps 13Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 81Warning triangle 228Washer fluid 63– content of the reservoir 63Washer fluid reservoir 63Washing the car, refer to


Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 113

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 123

Waveband with the radio 160Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 211Weights 237Welcome lamps 98Wheel/tire combination, refer

to Correct wheels and tires 212

Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 235

Wheels, new 212Wheels and tires 204Width, refer to

Dimensions 235Wind deflector 42Windows 37– convenient operation 30– convenient operation with

convenient access 36– opening, closing 38– pinch protection system 38Windows, defrosting 105Windows, indicator on Control

Display 16Windshield– cleaning 62– defrosting and removing

condensation 105Windshield wash 62– filling capacity, reservoir 238– nozzles 63– reservoir for washer fluid 63– washer fluid 63Windshield wiper blades,

changing 221Windshield wipers, blades,

care, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 62

Winter tires 213– setting speed limit 83– storage 213Wiper blade replacement 221Wiper system 62"With highways" in

navigation 142Wooden trim, refer to Caring

for your vehicle brochureWord-matching principle for

navigation 142Work in the engine

compartment 214Wrench/screwdriver, refer to

Onboard tool kit 221

XxDrive 87


Re

fere

nce

261

At

a g

lan

ceC

on

tro

lsD

rivi

ng

tip

sC

omm

unic

atio

nsN

avi

ga

tio

nE

nte

rta

inm

en

tM

ob

ilit

y

Xenon lamps– replacing bulb 222

YYour individual vehicle– settings, refer to Personal

Profile 28


RefuelingSo that you always have access to the data you need when refueling, you are recommended to enter the relevant figures for your car in the table provided below. Consult the index for indi-vidual specifications.

Fuel

Engine oil

Do not add engine oil until the corresponding warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up, refer to page 217.

Tire inflation pressures

Quality

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Preferred oil specifications

Summer tiresFront Rear

Winter tiresFront Rear

Up to 4 persons

4 persons plus luggage


0141

001

301

5 u

e iD

rive

*BL0013015004*

The UltimateDriving Machine

More about BMW

bmwusa.com


bmw e93 owner's manual

Documents